Carel WB000S series, WB000D series User Manual

Download

High Efficiency Solutions

UltraCella

NO POWER

& SIGNAL

CABLES

TOGETHER

READ CAREFULLY IN THE TEXT!

Electronic control for Cold Rooms

User manual

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

WARNING

CAREL developed its products thanks to the several years of experience in the HVAC ﬁ eld, continuous investment in technological innovation of the product, rigorous quality procedures and processes with in-circuit and function tests on 100% of its production, as well as the most innovative production technologies available on the market. CAREL and its branch oﬃ ces/aﬃ liates do not guarantee, in any case, that all the aspects of the product and the software included in the product will respond to the demands of the ﬁ nal application, even if the product is built according to state-of-the-art techniques. The client (builder, developer or installer of the ﬁ nal equipment) assumes every responsibility and risk relating to the conﬁ guration of the product in order to reach the expected results in relation to the speciﬁ c ﬁ nal installation and/or equipment. CAREL, in this case, through speciﬁ c agreements, can intervene as consultant for the positive result of the ﬁ nal start-up machine/application, but in no case can it be held responsible for the positive working of the ﬁ nal equipment/apparatus.

The CAREL product is a state-of-the-art product, whose operation is speciﬁ ed in the technical documentation supplied with the product or can be downloaded, even prior to purchase, from the website www.carel.com. Each CAREL product, in relation to its advanced technological level, needs a phase of deﬁ nition / conﬁ guration / programming / commissioning so that it can function at its best for the speciﬁ c application. The lack of such phase of study, as indicated in the manual, can cause the ﬁ nal product to malfunction of which CAREL cannot be held responsible. Only qualiﬁ ed personnel can install or carry out technical assistance interventions on the product. The ﬁ nal client must use the product only in the manner described in the documentation related to the product itself.

Without excluding proper compliance with further warnings present in the manual, it is stressed that in any case it is necessary, for each CAREL product:

• Not allow the electronic circuits getting wet. Rain, humidity and all types of

liquids or condensate contain corrosive mineral substances that can damage the electrical circuits. In any case, the product should be used and stored in environments that respect the temperature and humidity limits speciﬁ ed in the manual;

• Not to install the device in a particularly hot environments. Temperatures that

are too high can shorten the duration of the electronic devices, damaging them and distorting or melting the parts in plastic. In any case, the product should be used and stored in environments that respect the temperature and humidity limits speciﬁ ed in the manual;

• Not to try to open the device in any way diﬀ erent than that indicated in the

manual;

• Not to drop, hit or shake the device, because the internal circuits and

mechanisms could suﬀ er irreparable damage.

• Not to use corrosive chemical products, aggressive solvents or detergents to

clean the device;

• Not to use the product in application environments diﬀ erent than those

speciﬁ ed in the technic

al manual.

All the above reported suggestions are also valid for the control, serial boards, programming keys or however for any other accessory in the CAREL product portfolio. CAREL adopts a continuous development policy. Therefore, CAREL reserves the right to carry out modiﬁ cations and improvements on any product described in this document without prior notice.

The technical data in the manual can undergo modiﬁ cations without forewarning.

The liability of CAREL in relation to its products is speciﬁ ed in the CAREL general contract conditions, available on the website www.carel.com and/or by speciﬁ c agreements with customers; speciﬁ cally, to the extent where allowed by applicable legislation, in no case will CAREL, its employees or subsidiaries be liable for any lost earnings or sales, losses of data and information, costs of replacement goods or services, damage to things or people, downtime or any direct, indirect, incidental, actual, punitive, exemplary, special or consequential damage of any kind whatsoever, whether contractual, extra-contractual or due to negligence, or any other liabilities deriving from the installation, use or impossibility to use the product, even if CAREL or its subsidiaries are warned of the possibility of such damage.

DISPOSAL

INFORMATION FOR THE USERS REGARDING THE CORRECT HANDLING OF WASTE ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT (WEEE)

With reference to European Parliament and Council Directive 2002/96/EC issued on 27 January 2003 and the related national implementation legislation, please note that:

• WEEE cannot be disposed of as municipal waste, said waste must be collected

separately;

• the public or private waste collection systems deﬁ ned by local legislation must

be used. Moreover, the equipment can be returned to the distributor at the end of its working life when buying new equipment;

• this equipment may contain dangerous substances: improper use or incorrect

disposal of such may have negative eﬀ ects on human health and on the environment;

• the symbol (crossed-out wheeley bin) shown on the product or on the

packaging and on the instruction sheet indicates that the equipment has been introduced onto the market after 13 August 2005 and that it must be disposed of separately;

• in the event of illegal disposal of electrical and electronic waste, the penalties are

speciﬁ ed by local waste disposal legislation.

Materials warranty: 2 years (from the date of production, excluding consumables).

Type-approval: the quality and safety of CAREL S.P.A. products are guaranteed by the design system and ISO 9001 certiﬁ ed production.

HACCP: CAUTION

The Food Safety programs based on HACCP procedures and on certain national standards, require that the devices used for food preservation are periodically checked to make sure that the measuring errors are within the allowed limits of the application of use.

Carel recommends compliance with the indications of European standard “Temperature recorders and thermometers for transport, storage and distribution of chilled, frozen, deep-frozen/ quick-frozen food and ice cream – PERIODIC VERIFICATION “, EN 13486 -2001 (or subsequent updates)or similar standards and prescriptions applicable in the country of use.

The manual contains further indications regarding technical feature, proper installation and conﬁ guration of the product.

NO POWE

& SIGNAL

CABLES

TOGETHE

READ CAREFULLY IN THE TEXT!

WARNING: separate the probe cables and the digital input cables as

much as possible from the inductive load and power cables to prevent possible electro-magnetic interference. Never introduce power cables and signal cables (including those of electric control board) into the same cable troughs.

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

Content

1. INTRODUCTION 7

1.1 Codes ................................................................................................................................7

1.2 Expansion modules .................................................................................................8

2. INSTALLATION 9

2.1 Assembly and sizes (mm) ...................................................................................9

2.2 Structure ......................................................................................................................10

2.3 Wiring diagram ........................................................................................................11

2.4 Expansion modules assembly ........................................................................12

2.5 Ultra EVD module ...................................................................................................14

2.6 Ultra Power module ..............................................................................................15

2.7 EVDice ...........................................................................................................................16

2.8 Ultra 3ph module EVAPORATOR ...................................................................16

2.9 Ultra 3ph module FULL ......................................................................................17

2.10 Installation ..................................................................................................................18

2.11 Connection in supervisoring network ......................................................18

2.12 UltraCella Service terminal ...............................................................................19

2.13 Upload/download parameters (USB memory key) .........................19

3. USER INTERFACE 20

3.1 Display ...........................................................................................................................20

3.2 Keyboard .....................................................................................................................21

3.3 Programming ............................................................................................................22

3.4 Procedures ..................................................................................................................24

3.5 Multifunction menu ............................................................................................. 26

3.6 Message language selection ..........................................................................30

4. COMMISSIONING 31

4.1 First commissioning .............................................................................................31

4.2 Parameters to be set for the commissioning ........................................31

4.3 Single digit display models cod. WB000S* commissioning .........31

4.4 Double digit display models cod. WB000D* commissioning ...32

4.5 Commissioning with UltraCella Service Terminal ..............................32

4.6 Main function commissioning .......................................................................33

4.7 Light management ...............................................................................................37

4.8 Other conﬁ guration parameters ..................................................................37

4.9 Ultra EVD EVO module commissioning ...................................................39

4.10 EVDice commissioning .......................................................................................40

4.11 Ultra 3Ph Evaporator module commissioning.....................................42

4.12 Ultra 3Ph Full module commissioning......................................................43

5. OUTPUTS CONFIGURATION AND PROTECTIONS 44

5.1 Analogue output .................................................................................................... 44

5.2 Digital Outputs ........................................................................................................ 44

6. CONTROL 45

6.1 Switching the controller ON and OFF ......................................................45

6.2 Virtual probe ..............................................................................................................45

6.3 Set point.......................................................................................................................45

6.4 Pump down ...............................................................................................................47

6.5 Autostart in pump down ..................................................................................48

6.6 Continuous cycle ....................................................................................................48

6.7 Door switch control ..............................................................................................48

6.8 Defrost ...........................................................................................................................49

6.9 Evaporator Fans .......................................................................................................51

6.10 Condenser fans ........................................................................................................53

6.11 Duty setting ...............................................................................................................55

6.12 Bowl resistance ........................................................................................................55

6.13 Defrosting with 2 evaporators .......................................................................55

6.14 Second compressor with rotation ...............................................................56

6.15 Control with dead band .....................................................................................57

6.16 AUX output activation by time band.........................................................57

6.17 Humidity management......................................................................................58

6.18 Deumidiﬁ cazione ...................................................................................................59

6.19 Generic functions ...................................................................................................61

6.20 Conﬁ gurazione uscite .........................................................................................63

7. PARAMETERS TABLE 65

8. SIGNALS AND ALARMS 76

8.1 Signalling .....................................................................................................................76

8.2 Alarms............................................................................................................................76

8.3 Reset alarms ...............................................................................................................76

8.4 HACCP alarms and display ...............................................................................76

8.5 EVD EVO alarms .......................................................................................................77

8.6 EVDice alarms ...........................................................................................................77

8.7 3PH module alarms...............................................................................................78

8.8 Alarm parameters ..................................................................................................79

8.9 HACCP Alarm parameters and monitoring activation .................80

8.10 High condenser temperature alarm .........................................................80

9. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 81

9.1 UltraCella technical characteristics..............................................................81

9.2 EVD Modules technical characteristics .....................................................82

9.3 Power Modules technical characteristics ................................................82

9.4 3PH EVAPORATOR Modules technical characteristics .....................82

9.5 3PH FULL Modules technical characteristics ........................................83

10. ELECTRICAL WIRING 3PH MODULES 84

10.1 Electrical wiring 3PH EVAPORATOR Module ..........................................84

10.2 Electrical wiring 3PH FULL Module .............................................................91

11. SOFTWARE RELEASE 99

11.1 Software release table .........................................................................................99

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

1. INTRODUCTION

Ultracella is a family of products consisting of a control system for the basic functions of a cold room to which can be added further modules for accessory functionalities (e.g. electronic valve, power relays, etc.).

The user interface ensures ease in use and it consists, depending on the models, of:

• wide led display on which can be viewed the operating temperature

and the active loads;

• a graphic terminal with text strings in multiple languages, which

guide the user during commissioning (wizard). It is also equipped with contextual help menus accessible during programming, that provide an accurate description of the alarms.

The graphic terminal is also available as a “service tool”, which is useful when the control has the only LED interface.

UltraCella has a port for the insertion of a USB memory key to:

• load the languages for the graphic terminal during the ﬁ rst

commissioning;

• parameters upload/download;

• other operations reserved for the service centre (e.g. software update);

• download log of temperature recorded.

When mounting the optional modules are matched to the right of the main control system and connected to it with watertight coupling, to ensure the IP degree of protection of the assembly.

Main characteristics:

• 6 relay outputs: compressor, defrost, fan, light, AUX1, AUX2;

• assembly on guide DIN or wall;

• LED board with bright display with 3 digits, with decimal point and

icons that indicate the operating status;

• integration of the keys in the front panel (LED board) to ensure a high

degree of protection (IP65) and safety during operation and cleaning;

• availability of 10 sets of parameters (recipes) preloaded by CAREL

but modiﬁ able, corresponding to the same number of parameters conﬁ gurations, to adapt the control to the speciﬁ c conservation needs required by the cold room;

• navigation on intuitive user interface with contextual backlight

keyboard;

• defrost can be driven using the keyboard, digital input and supervisor;

• various types of defrost managements, on one or two evaporators:

natural (with stop compressor), resistance, hot gas;

• control of compressors with up to 2 Hp or up to 3 Hp with the

accessory power module;

• temperature control with virtual adjustment probe;

• digital inputs that can be conﬁ gurated for alarm activation, enabling or

activating defrost, door switch, auxiliary output, on / oﬀ , etc;

• control of 1 compressor with double step or of two compressors, even

with rotation;

• keyboard safety: operation of the single keys can be disabled to avoid

tampering;

• light management by door switch or dedicated key;

• alarm buzzer;

• HACCP function: temperature monitoring and adjustment in case of

alarm due to high temperature during operation or after black out;

• RS485 network connection for remote monitoring and supervision

sytems.

The accessory modules allow:

• the installation of the electronic expansion valve, using the module

with CAREL EVD Evolution driver dedicated to the control of superheat;

• compressor control with power relay of up to 3 Hp;

• the use of a single-phase circuit breaker switch in addition to the

power relay.

UltraCella

Fig. 1.a

1.1 Part numbers

P/N Description

WB000S**F0 UltraCella, led display with single row WB000D**F0 UltraCella, led display with double row

Tab. 1.a

Fig. 1.b Fig. 1.c

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

1.2 Expansion modules

EVD Module (P/N WM00E***00)

Expansion module containing the supply transformer and the driver EVD Evo to control the electronic expansion valve.

P/N Description

WM00ENS000 Ultra EVD Module without EVD display WM00ENSI00 Ultra EVD Module with EVD I/E display WM00ENNI00 “Closed” Ultra EVD module - commissioning with UltraCella WM00EUN000 “Closed” Ultra EVD module with Ultracap – commissioning

with UltraCella WM00EUS000 Ultra EVD module with Ultracap without EVD display WM00EUK000 “Closed” Ultra EVD module with Ultracap, stand-alone -

commissioning with UltraCella WM00EUC000 Ultra EVD module without EVD display with Ultracap, stand-

alone

Tab. 1.b

Fig. 1.a Fig. 1.b Fig. 1.c

Power module (P/N WM00P000*N)

Expansion module that contains the circuit breaker switch and 3 Hp relay for compressor control. There is also a version without relay, to give way to the installer to insert devices suitable for the application (contactors, safety devices, etc.)

P/N Description

WM00P0003N Ultra Power Module main switch and 3HP relay WM00P000NN Ultra Power Module main switch

Tab. 1.c

Fig. 1.d

Three-phase power modules (P/N WT00S*00N0)

Power 3PH Modules are expansion modules for controlling a single threephase load, usually the defrost heater. They include a pre-wired threephase contactor and a four-pole circuit breaker.

P/N Description

WT00SB00N0 Power 3PH module with circuit breaker, defrost 6A WT00SC00N0 Power 3PH module with circuit breaker, defrost 10A WT00SD00N0 Power 3PH module with circuit breaker, defrost 16A

Tab. 1.a

Fig. 1.d

Three phases expansion Modules

Ultra 3PH Evaporator Modules are expansion modules to control threephase evaporators. They have to be combined with UltraCella controls P/Ns WB000S% or WB000D% and have inside high power actuators to handle directly three-phase loads of the evaporator.

Ultra 3PH Full Modules are expansion modules to control three-phase condensing and evaporator units. They have to be combined with UltraCella controls P/Ns WB000S% or WB000D% and have inside high power actuators to handle directly three-phase loads of the condensing and evaporator units.

P/N Description

WT00E600N0 Ultra 3PH Evaporator module 6kW WT00E900N0 Ultra 3PH Evaporator module 9kW WT00EA00N0 Ultra 3PH Evaporator module 20 kW WT00F4B0N0 Ultra 3PH module Full 4HP WT00F7C0N0 Ultra 3PH module Full 7,5Hp

Tab. 1.d

Fig. 1.e Fig. 1.f

UltraCella Service Terminal

The UltraCella control can be connected to an external terminal, without having to open the unit, for easy commissioning and programming of the control parameters, to be used with the controls having LED display. When connecting the UltraCella Service Terminal the LED interface is temporarily disabled.

P/N Description

PGDEWB0FZ0 UltraCella Service with pGD1 user interface PGDEWB0FZK UltraCella Service with pGD1 user interface + 3 m.

cable and S90CONN001 connector

Tab. 1.e

Fig. 1.e

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

2. INSTALLATION

2.1 Assembly and sizes (mm)

The control system has holes on the lower and right side, in which the installer can insert the cable glands.

200

290

87,5

107,5

47,5

100

62 62

380

Fig. 2.a Fig. 2.b

Mounting

A: with DIN rail B: without DIN rail

121

260

156

Ø 4,5

1.a: Fix the DIN rail and insert the controller 1.b: Make 4 holes (Ø 4,5 mm) according to the drilling template and insert the dowels (mm)

121

2.a: Remove the frames, loosen the screws (1) and open the panel 2.b: Remove the frames

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

A A

121

3.a: Mark on the wall the positions of the lower holes, remove the panel and perform the drills (Ø 4.5 mm); insert the plugs. Replace the panel on the DIN guide and ﬁ x it fastening the lower screws.

3.b: Fasten the screws (1) and ﬁ x the panel. Loosen the screws (2) and open the panel.

121

power supply, compressor

fan, actuators

probes, digital inputs

connection to option modules

4: Use the holes and mount the cable glands to connect:

• on the lower side: supply cables, probes, actuators;

• on the right side: cables for the connection of accessory modules;

5: Close the panel fastening the screws (2).

Caution: separate the power cables (supply, actuators) from the signal cables

(probes, digital inputs).

Note: use a hole saw to drill the knock-outs (A).

2.2 Structure

Models with single digit display cod. WB000S*

3 4 3

3 45678 3

Key

1 Keyboard

2 Display

3 Wall mounting holes

4 Locking screws

5 Connector for UltraCella Service (*)

6 Green LED (*)

7 Red LED (*) 8 USB Port (*)

(*) Visible after removing the bottom frame

Fig. 2.c

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

Models with double digit display cod. WB000D*

3 4 3

3 45678 3

Key

1 Keyboard

2 Display

3 Wall mounting holes

4 Locking screws

5 Connector for UltraCella Service (*)

6 Green LED (*)

7 Red LED (*) 8 USB port (*)

(*) Visible after removing the bottom frame

Fig. 2.d

2.3 Wiring diagram

FieldBus

24 Vac

BMS

230 V 20 A max

EN60730-1 UL 873

250 V

R5 - R6

12 (10) A 12 A res. 2HP 12FLA 72 LRA

CAREL NTC, PT1000 CAREL NTC, PT1000 CAREL NTC, PT1000

CAREL NTC, analog input 0 to 10 Vdc

B5 analog input (4 to 20 mA)

OUT

0 to 5 Vdc

DI1

Door switch

B3 B2 B1

48 47 46 45 44 43

49 50 51 52 53 54

GND

Rx/Tx+

Rx/Tx-

GND

Rx/Tx+

Rx/Tx-

GND

Rx/Tx+

Rx/Tx-

GND

Y1 B4 B5

DI1 DI2 DI3

GND 5 VREF + Vdc

30 29 28

27 26 25

21 20 19

24 23 22

analog output (0 to 10 Vdc)

EN60730-1 UL 873

250 V

R3 - R4

10 A res. 5 (3) A 10 A res. 5FLA 18 LRA

EN60730-1 UL 873

250 V

R1 - R2

8 (4) A N.O. 8 A res. 2FLA 12 LRA

DEF

FAN

LIGHT

UltraCella Control

34 35 36

37 38 39

40 41 42

GND

to graphic terminal display

to remote terminal display

to LED display board

to connector board

CMP

Key

B1…B5 Analogue inputs 1…5 DI1 Door switch DI2, DI3 Digital inputs 2, 3 Y1 0…10 V analogue output GND Grounding for signals 5 VREF Ratiometric pressure

probe power supply

+Vdc Active probe supply

(humidity)

CMP DO1 (*) Compressor DEF DO2 (*) Defrost FAN DO3 (*) Evaporator fan LIGHT DO4 (*) Light AUX1 DO5 (*) Auxiliary

output 1

AUX2 DO6 (*) Auxiliary

output 2

L, N Power Supply Fieldbus Fieldbus Serial (19200

Baud, 8 bit, 2 bit stop, no parity)

BMS BMS Serial (*) Digital outputs display in the multifunction module (see chap. 3).

Fig. 2.e

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

2.4 Expansion modules assembly

Dimensions (mm)

260

drilling template

47,5

128 110

290

87,5

107,5

Ø32

103

Ø 4,5

47,5

101

87,5

107,5

Ø32

Fig. 2.f

Overall drilling template (mm)

If UltraCella and expansion modules have to be mounted at the same time, use the overall drilling template.

260

103

Ø 4,5 mm

156

DIN RAIL

UltraCella

Expansion Module

3343214

Fig. 2.g

Layout

If more than one expansion modules it is to assemble, use the arrangement of ﬁ gure to optimize the wiring.

121

UltraCella Control

Power Module

EVD Module

Fig. 2.h

Mounting

A B

121

1: Use a hole saw to drill the panel in correspondence with the predrilled holes (steps A, B). If present, fasten the DIN rail for the module

2: Remove the faceplates. Unscrew the screws (3) and open the UltraCella control

WM00ENS000 WM00ENSI00

WM00ENNI00

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

A A

3: Raise the cover or remove the faceplates and unscrew the screws to remove the panel and open the module.

4: Put the module close to UltraCella control and insert the coupling clamps supplied as standard.

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

2.5 Ultra EVD module

Mounting with DIN rail

5.a Mark the positions of the bottom holes on the wall (A), remove the coupling clamps (B), extract the module (C). Drill the corresponding holes (Ø 4,5 mm) and insert the anchors. Place again the module: mount the coupling clamps (B) and fasten the screws (A).

VBAT

COMA

NOA

1324

Tx/RxGND

DI1

GND

DI2

VREF

PRI 230 V

SEC 24 V

A A

Fig. 2.i

Mounting without DIN rail

5.b Mark the positions of the 4 holes (A), remove the coupling clamps (B), extract the module (C). Drill the corresponding holes (Ø 4,5 mm), depending on drilling template and insert the anchors. Place again the module: mount the coupling clamps (B) and fasten the screws (A).

VBAT

COMA

NOA

1324

Tx/RxGND

DI1

GND

DI2

VREF

PRI 230 V

SEC 24 V

A A

Fig. 2.j

WM00ENNI00, WM00EUN000 and WM00EUK000: Connect UltraCella to EVD module by serial cable in according with following wiring diagram e refer to below parameters table about EVD Evo driver commissioning.

WM00ENSI00, WM00ENS000, WM00EUS000 and WM00EUC000:

1. Driver commissioning by EVD Evo display.

Connect auxiliary UltraCella output AUX1 or AUX2 relay to digital input DI1 of EVD Evo and set parameters in this way:

• H1=7 (for AUX1) or H5=7 (for AUX2) -> second delayed compressor

• C11=0 -> delay activation second compressor = 0

In this way auxiliary output is set like free contact cooling request, suitable to be connected to digital input DI1 of EVD Evo driver. No setting is requested in UltraCella.

2. EVD Evo driver commissioning by UltraCella

Connect UltraCella to EVD module by serial cable in according with following wiring diagram e refer to below parameters table about EVD Evo driver commissioning. If its’ connected by serial cable, driver parameters can be displayed only (not modiﬁ able) by local EVD Evo display. Once driver is abled by UltraCella (parameter P1=1) its parameters are ones communicated and set by UltraCella, in according with below parameters table (modiﬁ able by UltraCella only); parameters eventually previously set by EVD Evo display will be lost.

VBAT

COMA

NOA

1324

GND Tx/Rx

DI1

S3S2S1

GND

DI2

VREF

2 AT

24 Vac

25 VA

shield

ratiometric pressure transducer

CAREL ExV

giallo/yellow

bianco/white

verde/green

marrone/brown

24 Vac

BMS

230 V

EN60730-1 UL 873

250 V

R5 - R6

12 (10) A 12 A res. 2HP 12FLA 72 LRA

CAREL NTC, PT1000 CAREL NTC, PT1000 CAREL NTC, PT1000

CAREL NTC, analog input 0 to 10 Vdc

B5 analog input (4 to 20 mA)

OUT

0 to 5 Vdc

DI1

(**)

Door switch

B3 B2 B1

48 47 46 45 44 43

49 50 51 52 53 54

GND

Rx/Tx+

Rx/Tx-

GND

Rx/Tx+

Rx/Tx-

GND

Rx/Tx+

Rx/Tx-

GND

Y1 B4 B5

DI1 DI2 DI3

GND 5 VREF + Vdc

analog output (0 to 10 Vdc, PWM)

EN60730-1 UL 873

250 V

R3 - R4

10 A res. 5 (3) A 10 A res. 5FLA 18 LRA

EN60730-1 UL 873

250 V

R1 - R2

8 (4) A N.O. 8 A res. 2FLA 12 LRA

CMP

DEF

FAN

LIGHT

UltraCella Control

EVD Module

30 29 28 27 26 25

21 20 19

24 23 22

34 35 36

37 38 39

40 41 42

GND

FieldBus

Fig. 2.k

ULTRACELLA CONTROL ULTRA EVD MODULE BLIND

cod. WM00ENNI00

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

2.6 Ultra Power module

Mounting with DIN rail

5.a Mark the positions of the bottom holes (A), remove the coupling clamps (B), extract the module (C). Drill the corresponding holes (Ø 4,5 mm) and insert the anchors. Place again the module: mount the coupling clamps (B) and fasten the screws (A).

A A

Fig. 2.l

Mounting without DIN rail

5.b Mark on the wall the positions of the 4 holes (A), remove the coupling clamps (B), extract the module (C). Drill the corresponding holes (Ø 4,5 mm), depending on drilling template and insert the anchors Place again the module: mount the coupling clamps (B) and fasten the screws (A).

A A

Fig. 2.m

Connect electrically the mudule wiring according to the diagram.

FieldBus

L N

230 V~

CMP

Circuit Breaker

Relay 3Hp (*)

PE1 2

24 Vac

BMS

230 V 20 A max

EN60730-1 UL 873

250 V

R5 - R6

12 (10) A 12 A res. 2HP 12FLA 72 LRA

48 47 46 45 44 43

49 50 51 52 53 54

GND

Rx/Tx+

Rx/Tx-

GND

Rx/Tx+

Rx/Tx-

GND

Rx/Tx+

Rx/Tx-

GND

EN60730-1 UL 873

250 V

R3 - R4

10 A res. 5 (3) A

10 A res. 5FLA 18 LRA

EN60730-1 UL 873

250 V

R1 - R2

8 (4) A N.O. 8 A res. 2FLA 12 LRA

DEF

FAN

LIGHT

UltraCella Control

Power

Module

to graphic terminal display

to connector

board

BROWN

CYAN

RED

CYAN

CAREL NTC, PT1000 CAREL NTC, PT1000 CAREL NTC, PT1000

CAREL NTC, analog input 0 to 10 Vdc

B5 analog input

(4 to 20 mA)

OUT

M +V

0 to 5 Vdc

DI1

(**)

Door switch

B3 B2 B1

B4 B5

DI1 DI2 DI3

GND 5 VREF + Vdc

analog output (0 to 10 Vdc, PWM)

30 29 28 27 26 25

21 20

24 23 22

34 35 36

37 38 39

40 41 42

GND

CYAN

BROWN

Fig. 2.n

ULTRACELLA CONTROL

ULTRA POWER MODULE

(*) Note: highlighted wires and 3hp relay supplied with the module code WM00P0003N

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

2.7 EVDice

For details on assembling EVD ICE on the evaporator, see the user manual, +0300037EN Connect UltraCella to the EVD ICE driver via the Fieldbus serial line (RS485 Modbus protocol), as shown in the following wiring diagram, and refer to the parameter table for the driver conﬁ guration

shield

230 Vac

S2 S1

CAP

Non rimuovere il cappuccio di protezione!

Do not remove the protection cap!

ULTRACAP

Module

CAREL E

V / E3V

unipolar valve

GASType

Mode

Super Heat

verde/ nero /

bianco / white

green

black

GND

Tx / Rx-

Tx / Rx+

marrone / blu /

brown

blue

nero /

black

230 V 20 A max

24 Vac

to graphic terminal

FieldBus

BMS

EN60730-1 UL 873

250 V

R5 - R6

12 (10) A 12 A res. 2HP 12FLA 72 LRA

to LED display board

CAREL NTC, PT1000 CAREL NTC, PT1000 CAREL NTC, PT1000

CAREL NTC, analog input 0 to 10 Vdc

B5 analog input (4 to 20 mA)

OUT

0 to 5 Vdc

DI1

(**)

Door switch

to connector board

B3 B2 B1

48 47 46 45 44 43

49 50 51 52 53 54

GND

Rx/Tx+

Rx/Tx-

GND

Rx/Tx+

Rx/Tx-

GND

Rx/Tx+

Rx/Tx-

GND

B4 B5

DI1 DI2 DI3

GND 5 VREF + Vdc

analog output (0 to 10 Vdc, PWM)

EN60730-1 UL 873

250 V

R3 - R4

10 A res. 5 (3) A

10 A res. 5FLA 18 LRA

EN60730-1 UL 873

250 V

R1 - R2

8 (4) A N.O. 8 A res. 2FLA 12 LRA

CMP

DEF

FAN

LIGHT

30 29 28 27 26 25

21 20

24 23 22

34 35 36

37 38 39

40 41 42

GND

Fig. 2.o

2.8 Ultra 3ph module EVAPORATOR

1. Following drilling template, drill 4 (6) holes on the wall:

• Unscrew 6 ﬁ xing screws of frontal cover

• Remove frontal cover

• Fix panel to the wall by using screws with suitable length to wall

thickness

• Drill side surface of expansion module where it’s necessary and ﬁ t

cable glands to connect: power supply cables, serial cable, probes and power cables for loads

300

290

160

Fig. 2.p

Important:

• separate the power cable (power supply, actuators) from the signal

cables (probes, digital inputs) and serial cable

• use cable with section suitable to current rating they have to carry

• connect clamp marked with PE to the ground of power supply system

2. Connect three-phase expansion to UltraCella by shielded serial cable

AWG 22

3. Close frontal by screwing the 6 screws

4. Power on UltraCella (230 Vac) and expansion three-phase module (400

Vac)

5. Activate magnetothermic switch.

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

QF1

KM2

KM1

QF2

AP1

XP1

XA1

KR3

KR2

I/O module

KR2

I/O module

CMP

DEF

FAN

LIGHT

to connector board

CAREL NTC, PT1000 CAREL NTC, PT1000 CAREL NTC, PT1000

analog output (0 to 10 Vdc, PWM)

CAREL NTC, analog input 0 to 10 Vdc

B5 analog input (4 to 20 mA)

0 to 5Vdc

GND

109

2727

110

2626

117

1818

118

2020

119

1919

120

2222

128

1616

129

1515

140

2828

141

2929

142

3030

143

2929

146

3131

147

2929

148

2525

149

2424

160

3232

161

3333

162

3434

PE1

PE2

PE3

AUX1:1AUX 1

AUX1:2AUX 1

TS1termostato di sicurezza

SP3Clicson evaporatore

AP3:LUltraCella

AP3:NUltraCella

ST1defrost

ST2defrost aux

TS2:Yventilatore evaporatore 0-10 Vdc

TS2:GNDventilatore evaporatore 0-10 Vdc

AUX2:1consenso unita' motocondensante

AUX2:2consenso unita' motocondensante

AP1:J6/-controllo

AP1:J6/+controllo

AP1:J6/GNDcontrollo

Fig. 2.q

2.9 Ultra 3ph module FULL

1. Following drilling template, drill 4 (6) holes on the wall:

• Unscrew 6 ﬁ xing screws of frontal cover

• Remove frontal cover

• Fix panel to the wall by using screws with suitable length to wall thickness

• Drill side surface of expansion module where it’s necessary and ﬁ t

cable glands to connect: power supply cables, serial cable, probes and power cables for loads

300

290

160

Fig. 2.r

Important:

• separate the power cable (power supply, actuators) from the signal

cables (probes, digital inputs) and serial cable

• use cable with section suitable to current rating they have to carry

• connect clamp marked with PE to the ground of power supply system

• after powering on three-phase expansion check the correct rating

current absorption on the loads

2. Connect three-phase expansion to UltraCella by shielded serial cable

AWG 22

QF1

KM2

KM3

KM1

QF2 QM1

AP1

XP1

XA1

TC1

KR2

Ultra 3PH I/O module

KR3

63 70 80 90

AP1

TC1

KR2

ltra 3PH

I/O modul

CMP

DEF

FAN

LIGHT

to connector board

CAREL NTC, PT1000 CAREL NTC, PT1000 CAREL NTC, PT1000

analog output (0 to 10 Vdc, PWM)

CAREL NTC, analog input 0 to 10 Vdc

B5 analog input (4 to 20 mA)

0 to 5Vdc

101

XA1:103

102

QF2:N2/XA1:106

103

XA1:101/KM3:14

104

XA1:105

105

XA1:104

106

XA1:108/XA1:102

107

KM3:62

108

XA1:106

109

KR2:11

110

KR2:14

111

FU2:2/XA1:113

112

KR1:A2/FU1:2

113

XA1:128/XA1:111

114

XA1:115

115

XA1:114

116

KR1:A1

117

??:J10/NO1

118

KM2:A1

119

??:J10/NO2

120

KM1:A1

121

??:J11/C3/4/5

122

XA1:126/??:J11/NO3

123

124

3535

125

KM3:A1

126

XA1:122

127

KM3:A2/XA1:129

128

??:J12/NC6/XA1:113

129

XA1:127/KR2:A2

140

??:J2/U1

141

XA1:143

142

??:J2/U2

143

XA1:145/XA1:141

144

??:J2/U3

145

??:J2/GND/XA1:143

146

??:J2/U6

147

KR1:11

160

AP:-

161

AP:+

162

AP:GND

PE109

TC1:PE

M1M

P P P

L N

GND

condenser fan 1 MV3:1

condenser fan 1 MV3:2

partialization pressure switch condenser fan SP1

condenser fan 2 MV4:1

condenser fan 2 MV4:2

crankcase heater RR2

aux 1 AUX1:1

aux 1 AUX1:2

kriwan AP2:L

kriwan AP2:N

kriwan AP2:11

kriwan AP2:14

pressure switch SP2

security thermostat TS1

evaporator clicson SP3

pump down TK1

liquid valve YV1

ultracella ULTRACELLA:L

ultracella ULTRACELLA:N

defrost ST1

defrost aux ST2

temp condensatore ST3

fan evaporatore 0-10vdc 7AP1:Y

fan evaporatore 0-10vdc 7AP1:GND

controller AP1:J6/-

controller AP1:J6/+

controller

AP1:J6/GND

Fig. 2.s

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

3. Close frontal by screwing the 6 screws

4. At the ﬁ rst start-up of the unit, it’s suggested to calibrate motor circuit

breaker on eﬀ ective compressor absorption rating

5. Power on UltraCella (230Vac) and expansion three-phase module

(400Vac)

6. Activate magnetothermic switch and motor circuit breaker

2.10 Installation

Proceed as follows for installation, making reference to the wiring diagrams in the previous paragraphs:

1. Connect the supply and probes: the probes can be remote-controlled up

to a maximum distance of 10 metres from the controller as long as cables with minimum section of 1 mm

are used.

2. Program the control: as indicated in chapter “Commissioning” and “User

interface”;

3. Connect the actuators: the actuators should only be connected after

having programmed the controller. It is recommended to carefully evaluate the maximum capacities of the relays indicated in table “Technical speciﬁ cations”.

4. Connection to the serial network (if present): all controls are ﬁ tted with a

serial connector for connection to the supervisory network.

Warnings: avoid installing UltraCella control system in environments with the following characteristics:

• relative humidity over 90% non-condensing;

• strong vibrations or knocks;

• exposure to continuous jets of water;

• exposure to aggressive and polluting atmospheric agents (e.g.: sulphur

and ammonia gases, saline mist, smoke) to avoid corrosion and/or oxidation;

• high magnetic and/or radio frequency interference (e.g. near

transmitting antennas);

• exposure of the control system to direct sunlight and atmospheric

agents in general.

The following recommendations must be respected when connecting the controllers:

Warnings:

• incorrect connection of the power supply may seriously damage the

control system;

• use cable ends that are suitable for the terminals. Loosen every screw

and ﬁ t the cable end, next tighten the screws and gently pull the cables to check their tightness. If using an automatic screwdriver, adjust the torque to a value less than 0.5 N · m;

• separate as much as possible (by at least 3 cm) the probe signal and

digital input cables from inductive loads and power cables, to avoid any electromagnetic disturbance. Never lay power cables and probe cables in the same cable conduits (including those for the electrical panels). Do not install the probe cables in the immediate vicinity of power devices (contactors, circuit breakers or other). Reduce the length of the sensor cables as much as possible, and avoid spirals around power devices;

• only use IP67 guaranteed probes as end defrost probes; place the

probes with the vertical bulb upwards, so as to facilitate drainage of any condensate. Remember that the thermistor temperature probes (NTC) have no polarity, so the order of connection of terminals is not important.

Caution: in order to ensure the safety of the unit in the event of serious alarms, all the electromechanical safety devices required

to guarantee correct operation must be ﬁ tted on the unit.

HACCP - CAUTION

When the temperature measurement is relevant for Food Safety (see HACCP), will be used only temperature probes suggested by Carel. The standards in force may require the compilation and preservation of appropriate documentation, as well as periodic checks on instrumentation and sensors. If in doubt, consult the person in charge of food safety or the manager of the plant.

2.11 Connection in supervisoring network

Warnings:

• properly ﬁ x the converter to avoid disconnections;

• perform the wiring without power supply;

• keep the cables of the converter CVSTDUMOR0 separate from power

cables (supply and relay outputs). The RS485 converter allows you to connect to the UltraCella control network to the monitoring network for complete control and monitoring of controls connected. The system provides a maximum of 207 units with a maximum length of 1000 m. For the connection it is requested the accessory standard (RS485-USB converter cod. CAREL CVSTDUMOR0) and a terminating resistor of 120 Ω to be placed on the terminals connected to the last control. Connect RS485 converter to the controls as shown in the ﬁ gure. For assigning the serial address see the parameter H0. See the instruction sheet of the converter for further information.

UltraCella 1

GND

USB-485 Converter

CVSTDUMOR0

120 Ω

T+

T -

GND

T-

T+

USB

UltraCella ...n

to BMS port

GND

T-

T +

to BMS port

Fig. 2.t

UltraCella can be connected to both PlantVisor and PlantWatch via BMS port (RS485). Starting from 1.5 release software, both CAREL and Modbus protocols are available from BMS port, selectable by H7 parameter.

- H7 = 0 CAREL protocol

- H7 = 1 Modbus protocol

Starting from software release 1.7, the baud rate, stop bits and parity of the BMS port can be set using parameters H10, H11 and H12; the data bits setting on the other hand remains ﬁ xed at 8.

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

Par. Description Def Min Max U.M.

H10 BMS baud rate bit/s

0 1200 5 38400 1 2400 6 57600 2 4800 7 76800 3 9600 8 115200 4 19200 9 375000

409-

H11 BMS stop bits

1 1 bit stop 2 2 bit stop

212-

H12 BMS parity

1 odd 2even

002-

Note: To make the change active, switch on and switch oﬀ the unit.

2.12 UltraCella Service terminal

The UltraCella Service Terminal has to be connected via a dedicated connector, that can be accessed after removing the lower frame Using the “UltraCella Service Terminal” you can:

• during the ﬁ rst commissioning: insert the ﬁ rst conﬁ guration parameters

following the guided procedure (wizard);

• during normal operation:

1. display the active loads and the main variables: temperature, humidity ;

2. perform the control programming, facilitated by contextual help.

121

Fig. 2.u

2.13 Upload/download parameters (USB memory key)

The USB memory key must be placed in the connector accessible after removing the lower frame. Using the USB memory key you can:

1. download the parameters set (r01...r10): control saves inside the key the

10 parameters set;

2. upload the parameters set (r01...r10): control loads from the key the

10 parameters set);

121

USB key

Fig. 2.v

Procedure:

1. remove the lower frame and insert the USB memory key. The red and

green LED beside the key will light up once in sequence to indicate the recognition by the unity of the USB memory key;

2. bring the control to OFF to upload (to copy the conﬁ gurations from the

USB key to the controller); to download (to copy the conﬁ gurations from the controller to the USB key), the controller can be in ON status;

3. press at the same time Prg and Set for 2 s and access the multifunction

menu: the message “HcP” will appear;

4. press “UP” until reaching the entry “USb”;

5. press “Set”;

6. choose whether you want to DOWNLOAD the parameters (= dnL), to

UPLOAD them (=uPd) or to exit the page (EXt);

7. press “Set”; the green LED will light up and will remain lit to indicate that

the upload / download of parameters occurred; if, for some reason, the procedure should not be successful, the red LED will turn on;

8. extract the key. The LED turns oﬀ . The ﬁ le is “.txt”type, and it can be

displayed on the computer.

1 21 2

1 2

1 21 2

Note: the ﬁ gure refers to the screens on models with single row

display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*, as well as the message indicated, during navigation the display shows the scrolling message "recipes in USB device” on the second row.

Note: the download and upload operations, as well as the 10 lists

of parameters, also copy all the other parameters (one value only for all 10 lists).

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

3. USER INTERFACE

The front panel contains the display and keyboard, made up from 10 or 11 keys (depending on the model), which, pressed individually or together, allow to perform all of the controller programming operations. The accessory UltraCella Service terminal, accessory terminal, allows the commissioning of the control system via a guided procedure (Wizard) and also programming the parameters with a contextual help that explains the various functions.

3.1 Display

On the LED display is shown the temperature range from -50 °C (-58 °F) to +150 °C (302 °F). The resolution of the tenth for temperatures in the range -19,9…99,9. In case of alarm the value of the probe is displayed in alternance with the codes of the active alarms. During programming, it displays the codes that identify the parameters and their value.

Note: you can select the standard display by properly conﬁ guring parameter /t1 (/t1 and /t2 for double digit models).

Front panel for single row display models

cod. WB000S*

Front panel for double row display models

cod. WB000D*

UltraCella Service Terminal (accessories)

SET

PRG

ESC

M E N U

H E L P

Multifunction menu

HACCP

Fig. 3.a Fig. 3.b Fig. 3.c

Icons table on models with single row display P/Ns WB000S*

Icon Function

Normal operation

Note

ON OFF Flashing

Technical

support

Alarms, for example alarm due to EEprom or probe fault

Serious problem detected. Please contact technical service

HACCP HACCP function enabled - HACCP alarm saved (HA and/or HF)

Door Door open Door Close Door open and door alarm active

Compressor On Oﬀ Waiting for activation

Blinks when the activation of the compressor is delayed by safety times.

Fan On Oﬀ Waiting for activation

Blinks when the activation of the compressor is delayed by safety times.

Clock

On if a scheduled defrost is requested

Tab. 3.a

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

Icons table on models with two rows display P/Ns. WB000D*

Icon Function

Normal operation

Note

ON OFF Flashing

Technical

support

Alarms, for example alarm due to EEprom or probe fault

Serious problem detected. Please contact technical service

HACCP HACCP function enabled - HACCP alarm saved (HA and/or HF)

Door Door open Door Close Door open and door alarm active

Compressor On Oﬀ Waiting for activation

Blinks when the activation of the compressor is delayed by safety times.

Fan On Oﬀ Waiting for activation

Blinks when the activation of the compressor is delayed by safety times.

Clock

On if a scheduled defrost is requested

Celsius

degrees

Temperature visualization in Celsius degrees

Farenheit

degrees

Temperature visualization in Farenheit degrees

humidity

percentage

Humidity visualization -

Tab. 3.b

3.2 Keyboard

Key Normal operation Blink

Pressing the individual key Combined pressure with other keys

On/Oﬀ

• Pressed for 2 s, turns the control OFF

• Pressed for 2 s, turns the control ON

• ESC function, return to higher level

• Pressed for 2 s, enters the programming menu

Prg + Set: if pressed at the same time for 2 s, allow access to the multifunction menu

ALARM

• In case of alarm: mutes the audible alarm (buzzer) and deactivates the alarm relay

• Pressed for 2 s, reset the manual reset alarms

Available only in case of alarm

• Turns the light on/oﬀ

• Turns auxiliary output 1 on/oﬀ (*) Flashing for 5 seconds: attempt to activate

auxiliary output 1 from button, yet output has diﬀ erent conﬁ guration

• Turns auxiliary output 2 on/oﬀ (*) Flashing for 5 seconds: attempt to activate

auxiliary output 1 from button, yet output has diﬀ erent conﬁ guration

DEF

• Activates/deactivates manual defrost Awaiting activation

• Set point setting

• Value setting

Prg + Set: if pressed at the same time for 2 s, allow access to the multifunction menu

Indicates that the set point is not that the value set for parameter St but rather deﬁ ned by one of the following algorithms:

• Change set point from digital input (St+r4

and/or StH+r5)

• Change set point from time band (St+r4

and/or StH+r5)

• Set point ramps (variable set point)

UP/DOWN

• Value increase/ decrease (ﬂ ashing) Light on steady signals that AUX3 and/or

AUX4 outputs are active. See paragraph

6.20 for further information.

Tab. 3.c

(*) To activate outputs AUX1 / AUX2 by button, set H1/H5=2. If parameters are not set, if AUX1/AUX2 key are pressed, they blink for 5 seconds

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

3.3 Programming

The parameters can be modiﬁ ed using the keyboard. Access to the conﬁ guration parameters is protected by a password that prevents unwanted modiﬁ cations or access by unauthorised persons. With the password you can access and change all the parameters of the control.

Note: in the LED display model the keys are illuminated according to the menu where the user is operating, in order to facilitate

navigation.

3.3.1 Changing the set point

In order to change the set point St (default =0°C):

1. the control system displays the standard display visualization;

2. press Set for 2 s: on the display appears the current value of the set

point;

3. press UP/DOWN to reach the desired value;

4. press Set to conﬁ rm the new set point value. The control returns to

standard display visualization.

1 21 2

Note: the ﬁ gure refers to the screens on models with single row

display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*, as well as the message indicated, during navigation the display shows the scrolling message “Setpoint” on the second row

3.3.2 Modiﬁ cation of the parameters (for models

with single digit display cod. WB000S*)

Procedure:

1. to modify the parameters, ﬁ rst switch the controller OFF (press ON/

OFF button);

2. press Prg for 2 s: on the display appears the message “PAS” - password

request;

3. press UP/DOWN and insert the password: 22. If you press Set, the

code of the ﬁ rst parameters category will appear: Probes (see the following table and parameters table);

4. press Set: the ﬁ rst parameter of the category will appear: /21;

5. press UP/DOWN until reaching the parameter to be modiﬁ ed;

6. press Set key to display the parameter value;

7. press UP/DOWN to reach the desired value;

8. press Set to conﬁ rm the new value and return to parameter code

display;

9. repeat the operations from 5) to 8) to change other parameters;

10. press Prg to return to higher level of the parameters categories and

UP/DOWN to pass to the next category: CtL. Repeat steps from 4) to

8) to access the category and change other parameters;

11. press one or more times Prg to exit the parameters modiﬁ cation

procedure and return to standard display visualization.

1 21 2

Note: in the parameters or set point modiﬁ cation procedures, the new value is saved every time the Set key is pressed.

Category Text Category Text

Probes Pro Clock rtc Control CtL Door and light doL Compressor CMP Recipes rcP Defrost dEF Generic functions GEF Alarms ALM EVD EVO EVO Fan FAn EVDice ICE Conﬁ guration CnF Three-phase modules 3PH HACCP HcP

Output conﬁ guration

OUT

Humidity management

HUM

Tab. 3.d

Note: if no key is pressed, after about 120 s the control automatically returns to standard display..

3.3.3 Modiﬁ cation of the parameters (for models with double digit display cod. WB000D*)

Procedure:

1. to modify the parameters, ﬁ rst switch the controller OFF (press ON/

OFF button);

2. press Prg for 2 sec: the second row of the display will show “PASS”

(password required);

3. press UP/DOWN to enter the password: 22;

4. press Set; the second row of the display will scroll the name of the

ﬁ rst category of parameters: Probes (see the previous table and the parameter table);

5. press Set: the second row of the display will scroll the code and

description of the ﬁ rst parameter in the category: /21 – Probe1 meas. stab.; the ﬁ rst row of the display will show the current value of the parameter;

6. press Set: the value on the ﬁ rst row of the display ﬂ ashes, to indicate

that the value can be modiﬁ ed;

7. press UP/DOWN until reaching the desired value;

8. press Set to conﬁ rm the new value; the value will stop ﬂ ashing;

9. press UP/DOWN to scroll the other parameters;

10. repeat steps 6) to 9) to modify other parameters;

11. press Prg to return to the top level of parameter categories, or UP/

DOWN to move the next category: CtL (Control). Then repeat steps from 5) to 9) to access the category and modify other parameters;

12. press Prg once or more than once to exit the parameter setting

procedure and return to the standard display.

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

Note: in the parameters or set point modiﬁ cation procedures, the

new value is saved every time the Set key is pressed.

Note: if no key is pressed, after about 120 s the control

automatically returns to standard display.

3.3.4 Example 1: current date/time setting

Procedure:

1. access the parameters modiﬁ cation menu as described in the

relative paragraph;

2. enter category “rtc”;

3. select parameter “tcE” and set it to 1 to enable the date exchange;

4. press UP 2 times and then set the parameters regarding the year

(Y), month (M), day of the month (d), hour (h), minutes (n) (see table below);

5. press UP, select tct parameter and set it from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0 to

perform the data/ time change;

6. select again parameter tcE and set it to 0;

7. press one or more times Prg to save the date/ time and return to

standard display.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

tcE Enabling date modiﬁ cation procedure

0/1=No/Yes

00 1 -

tcT Date/ time change

Action on change 0Æ1 or 1Æ0

00 1 -

y__ Date/ time: year 0 0 37 M__ Date/ time: month 1 1 12 d__ Date/ time: day of the month 1 1 31 h__ Date/ time: hour 0 0 23 n__ Date/ time: minute 0 0 59 -

1 21 2

Note: the ﬁ gure refers to the screens on models with single row display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*, as well as the message indicated, during navigation the display shows with a scrolling message, parametercode and description: “tce - enable data modiﬁ cation”.

3.3.5 Example 2: set the scheduled defrosting

periods

Procedure:

1. access the parameters modiﬁ cation menu as described in the relative

paragraph;

2. enter category “rtc”;

3. press UP and select the parameters “ddi (i = 1…8”) to select the

frequency of the ith defrost, based on the indications in the table below;

4. press UP and pass to the defrost hour and minute;

5. press once or more times Prg to save and return to standard

visualization.

0 ith defrosting disabled 1…7 Monday…Sunday 8 From Monday to Friday 9 From Monday to Saturday 10 Saturday and Sunday 11 Daily

1 21 2

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

3.4 Procedures

3.4.1 Parameter set selection

The control can work with 10 sets of parameters, pre-set in the factory by Carel, but modiﬁ able to suit your requirements, indicated with r01 r10 (recipe 1 ... recipe 10); In order to select the current parameters set (control in OFF):

1. from parameters modiﬁ cation menu, access the category “rcP” and

press Set; the message "bni" will appear; press Set again; the message “r0i” will appear where "r0i" ranges from 1 to 10 and indicates the currently active conﬁ guration on UltraCella;

2. press UP/DOWN to select the parameters set to be loaded; you can

choose between r01…r10; for example r02 (ﬁ gure);

3. Press Set to conﬁ rm. The control system loads the chosen parameters

set;

4. Press once or more times Prg to return to standard display..

1 21 2

Note: the ﬁ gure refers to the screens on models with single row display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*, as well as the message indicated, during navigation the display shows the scrolling message “bni - recipe index now active” on the second row.

Param Conﬁ gurations

Std

CAREL

Red meat Poultry Fish Vegetables Fruit Summer and

tropical fruit

Frozen Restaurant -

fresh food

Bakery

Heater defrost

with probe,

evap. fans

controlled by

temperature

and oﬀ during defrost

Heater defrost

with probe,

evap. fans controlled by temperature

and oﬀ during defrost

Heater defrost

with probe,

evap. fans

controlled by

temperature

and oﬀ during

defrost

Heater defrost

with probe,

evap. fans

on with

compressor

on and on

during defrost,

humidity

control

Timed defrost

by stopping compressor,

evap. fans on

with compressor

on and on

during defrost,

humidity control

No defrost,

evap. fans

on with

compressor

on, humidity

control

Heater defrost

with probe,

evap. fans

on with

compressor on

and oﬀ during

defrost

Heater defrost

with probe,

evap. fans

on with

compressor on

and on during

defrost

Heater

defrost

with probe,

evap. fans

controlled by

temperature

and oﬀ

during

defrost

r01 r02 r03 r04 r05 r06 r07 r08 r09 r10

/4 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 /t2 6 4 4 4 4 4 11 4 4 4 /A2 11 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 /A3 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 /A4 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 /A5 00 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 St 0 -0,5 0 1 4 4 10 -22 3 -20 rd 22 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 StH 90 90 90 90 95 95 85 90 90 90 rdH 55 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 r1 -50 -5 -5 -5 0 0 5 -25 0 -25 r2 60 10 10 10 10 10 15 -15 10 -10 r3 00 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 c11 44 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 d0 00 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 dI 8 12 12 12 24 24 8 15 13 15 dt1 4 20 15 10 8 4 4 15 10 15 dP1 30 60 60 60 45 30 30 60 90 60 AL 04 4 4 4 5 5 10 4 10 AH 05 5 10 5 5 5 6 5 6 Ad 120 60 60 120 60 60 60 60 60 60 A5 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 A9 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 F0 01 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 F1 5-8005 5 555-22 F2 30 30 30 30 15 15 10 30 30 30 F3 11 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 F4 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 H1 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H5 1 2 2 2 15 15 15 3 2 3 HO1 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 c12 55 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 d8d 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 tLi 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 A4 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Tab. 3.e

For all other parameters not included in this table, the default values will be used for all conﬁ gurations, as shown in chap.7 Parameter table.

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

DEACTIVATION MANUAL DEFROST

Press DEF: message “Oﬀ ” will appear and the control ends the defrost

1 21 2

Note: The Figures refer to the screens on models with single row display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*,

the message “Oﬀ ” appears on the second row of the display.

3.4.4 AUX1/AUX2/Light

In order to activate/deactivate the digital outputs AUX1/AUX2 (auxiliary mode outputs) from keyboard set the parameters H1/H5=2. The light output is ﬁ xed and cannot be conﬁ gured.

ACTIVATION

Press keys AUX1/AUX2/Light: message “On” will appear and the control activates the relative output.

1 21 2

1 221

DEACTIVATION

Press keys AUX1/AUX2/Light: message “Oﬀ ” will appear and the control deactivates the relative output.

1 21 2

1 221

1 21 2

Note: if output AUX1/2 was not enabled by setting H1/H5 = 2, the relative key blinks to signal that the output is not active. However,

the messages “On” and “Oﬀ ” will appear

Note: The Figures refer to the screens on models with single row display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*,

the message “On” and “Oﬀ ” appear on the second row of the display.

3.4.5 On/Oﬀ

In order to turn oﬀ the control from keyboard:

• press On/Oﬀ for 2 s.

The display will alternate Oﬀ to the standard display. The key On/Oﬀ lights up and any active output relay will be deactivated.

1 221

1 21 2

Note: The Figures refer to the screens on models with single row display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*,

the message “On” and “Oﬀ ” appear on the second row of the display.

3.4.2 Parameters set to default values

In order to set all parameters sets to the factory values (default):

1. from parameters modiﬁ cation menu, access the category “rcP”

and press Set; the message “r0i” will appear, where "i" indicates the currently active conﬁ guration ;

2. press UP/DOWN and display the message “bnr”;

3. press Set: the message “no” will appear;

4. press UP/DOWN: the message “Std” will appear;

5. press set: the control system brings all parameters sets to default

values;

6. press one or more times Prg to return to standard display.

Note: in this manner all the modiﬁ cations are erased and the original factory values are restored to the default ones, indicated

in parameters table.

3.4.3 Defrost

In order to activate the defrost by temperature, the defrost probe must detect a temperature lower than the temperature relative to defrost end (par. dt1). The defrost by time is activated setting dI parameter to a value >0.

Procedure:

1. press DEF. There can be 3 cases:

2. if the defrost probe detects a temperature greater than the value of

the defrost end temperature, the control displays the message “no” and the defrost is not activated;

3. if there are protections in progress, the control waits before entering

the defrost. The DEF button blinks and when conditions permit, the control enters the defrost;

4. control comes into defrost, it shows the message “On”. The DEF key

is lit and the defrost output is enabled. The display depends on parameter d6.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

d6 Terminal display during defrost

0 = Temperature alternated with dEF 1 = Last temperature shown before defrost 2 = dEF

102 -

ACTIVATION MANUAL DEFROST

1 21 2

Request a manual defrost

1 21 2

1 21 2 1 21 2 1 21 2

Case 1 Case 2 Case 3

Note: The Figures refer to the screens on models with single row display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*,

the message “no” and “On” appear on the second row of the display

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

In order to turn on the control from keyboard:

• press On/Oﬀ for 2 s.

“On” will appear on the display and then control returns to the standard display. The output relay will be re-activated.

1 221

1 21 2

Note: The Figures refer to the screens on models with single row display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*,

the message “On” and “Oﬀ ” appear on the second row of the display.

3.5 Multifunction menu

The multifunction menu allows you to access:

• “HcP”: HACCP alarms display, type HA and HF alarms and reset;

• “cc”: continuous cycle activation/deactivation;

• “rEc”: display maximum and minimum temperature, cancellation and

re-start recording;

• “I/O”, input/output: displaying the temperature read by the probe and

digital input status;

• “USB”: USB key;

• “InF”: information

• “Log”: datalogging function

• "SOF" UltraCella software update

Procedure:

1. press Prg and Set for 2 s; the ﬁ rst menu will appear: HcP;

2. press UP/DOWN to view other entries;

3. press Set to enter: follow the steps described in the following sections

for the relative explanations;

4. Press one or more times Prg to return to standard display.

1 21 2

Note: the ﬁ gure refers to the screens on models with single row

display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*, as well as the message indicated, during navigation the display shows the scrolling message “Menu” on the second row.

3.5.1 HACCP alarms display

For explanations regarding HACCP alarms, consult chapter “Alarms”. In the multifunction menu you can see the date and time of the last 3 alarms HA and HF. After entering the multifunction menu (see previous par.), select with UP / DOWN the message “HcP”.

Procedure:

1. press Set, and then UP / DOWN to display the parameters in the

following table: you can see the number of alarms, the relative date and you can also cancel the alarms;

2. press Set to display the alarm date and time;

3. press Prg until you return to standard display.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

HA Date/time of last HA alarm 0 - - HA1 Date/time of penultimate HA alarm 0 - - HA2 Date/time of third from last HA alarm 0 - - Han Number of HA alarms 0 0 15 HF Date/time of last HF alarm 0 - - HF1 Date/time of penultimate HF alarm 0 - - HF2 Date/time of third from last HF alarm 0 - - HFn Number of HF alarms 0 0 15 Hcr HACCP alarms cancelling

Action on variation 0Æ1 or 1Æ0

001 -

Each alarm is displayed with scrolling text, which contains the day of week, hour, minute, and the temperature that caused the alarm. This is a list (FIFO) in which are stored only the last 3 alarms. Instead, the alarm counters (HAn, HFn), after reaching 15, they stop.

Example: HA alarm triggered Thursday at 13:17, with detected temperature of 36.8 °C.

1 21 2

ÅÅÅÅÅÅ

Note: the ﬁ gure refers to the screens on models with single row

display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*, as well as the message indicated, during navigation the display shows the scrolling message “HACCP Alarms” on the second row

3.5.2 Continuous cycle

For explanation of continuous cycle, see chapter 6. In order to activate the continuous cycle

• the control must be on;

• the value of the parameter cc must be >0.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

cc Continuous cycle duration 0 0 15 hour

After entering the multifunction menu (see previous par.), select with UP / DOWN the message “cc”.

ACTIVATION

Procedure:

1. press Set; the message “OFF” will appear (continuous cycle disabled);

2. press UP/DOWN: the message “ON” appears;

3. after about 1 s the control returns to standard display and the

compressor icon appears, to show the activation of the function.

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

1 21 2

Note: the ﬁ gure refers to the screens on models with single row

display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*, as well as the message indicated, during navigation the display shows the scrolling message “Continuous cycle” on the second row.

DEACTIVATION

Follow the same activation steps and set “OFF”.

Note: the activation of the continuous cycle function does not

appear on display in standard mode.

3.5.3 Maximum and minimum temperature

monitoring

The control allows you to continuously record the minimum and maximum temperature measured by the control probe. The monitoring is always active. The values can be reset, as described below.

After entering the multifunction menu (see previous par.), select with UP / DOWN the message “rEc”.

Procedure:

1. press Set; the message “MAX” will appear (maximum registered

temperature); in order to see the maximum temperature, registration date and time pass to point 3 or:

2. press UP/DOWN: the message “MIn” appears (minimum temperature

registered);

3. press Set: the maximum/minimum recorded temperature will appear

along with the date/time of record (y=year, m = month, d = day, h = hour, m = minutes. Press UP to cancel (both temperatures), appears RES and the control exits the menu, or press Prg for more than once and exit the display.

Example: maximum registered temperature 36.9°C on 22/11/2013 at 9.34.

1 21 2

ÅÅÅÅÅÅ

Note: by pressing UP you will cancel both the maximum and the minimum recorded temperature.

Note: the Figures refer to the screens on models with single row display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*:

• MAX --> Max temp recorder (scrolling)

• 36,9 --> Max

• 13.Y --> year

• 11.M --> month

• 22.d --> day

• 9.H --> hour

• 34.m --> minute

3.5.4 Input/output status display

After entering the multifunction menu (see previous par.), select with UP / DOWN the message “I/O”.

Procedure:

1. Press Set: the message “b1” appears regarding the probe B1;

2. Press Set once again: the value read on probe B1 will appear

alternating with the message b1;

3. Press Prg to return to upper level;

4. Press UP/DOWN and repeat steps 1)…3) to display the inputs/

outputs indicated in table;

5. Press one or more times Prg to return to standard display

Text Description Text Description b1 Analogue input 1 do6 Digital output 6 b2 Analogue input 2 Y1 Analog output 1 b3 Analogue input 3 ESu EVD EVO suction temp. b4 Analogue input 4 ESA EVD EVO evap. temp. b5 Analogue input 5 ESH EVD EVO superheat di1 Digital input 1 ISu EVD ICE suction temperature di2 Digital input 2 ISa EVD ICE evaporation temperature di3 Digital input 3 ISH EVD ICE superheat do1 Digital output 1 U1 Defrost probe Sd1 (3PH model) do2 Digital output 2 U2 Auxiliary defrost probe Sd2 (3PH

model) do3 Digital output 3 U3 Condenser probe Sc (3PH model) do4 Digital output 4 dU4 Motor protector (3PH model) do5 Digital output 5 dU5 High/low pressure switch or Kriwan

alarm (3PH model)

Tab. 3.f

Note: the opened digital inputs/outputs are displayed along with the message “oP” (=open), those closed with “cLo” (=closed).

Example 1: probe B1 measures the temperature of -1.0 °C..

1 21 2

Note: the ﬁ gure refers to the screens on models with single row display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*,

as well as the message indicated, during navigation the display shows the

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

scrolling message “Probe1 status” on the second row “. Example 2: digital input 1 is closed.

1 21 2

Note: the ﬁ gure refers to the screens on models with single row

display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*, as well as the message indicated, during navigation the display shows the scrolling message “Digital input 1 status” on the second row.

3.5.5 USB memory key

Parameters upload/download

Preliminary operations:

1. remove the lower frame and insert the USB memory key;

2. set the control to OFF.

121

USB key

Fig. 3.d

After entering the multifunction menu (see previous par.), select with UP / DOWN the message “USb”.

Procedure:

Press Set: the following commands will appear by scrolling UP/DOWN:

• rcP: press Set to conﬁ rm;

• EXt: press Set to exit;

• dnL: press Set, the control saves inside the key the 10 parameters set:

r01…r10;

• uPd: press Set, the control loads from the key the 10 parameters set:

r01…r10;

Note

• the parameters are saved in a text ﬁ le type. txt, which can be viewed

on the computer;

• for information regarding the switching of the LEDs, see chapter 2.10.

1 21 2

Æ

1 21 2

ÅÅÅÅÅÅ

Note: the ﬁ gures refer to the screens on models with single row

display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*, as well as the message indicated, during navigation the display shows the scrolling message “recipes in USB device” on the second row

Note: the download and upload operations, as well as the 10 lists

of parameters, also copy all the other parameters (one value only for all 10 lists).

Download saved alarms

Starting from software release 1.5, the last 64 alarms activated and saved on UltraCella can be downloaded to a USB ﬂ ash drive, in order from the most recent to the oldest, in csv format. When the 64th alarm is saved, the next one will overwrite the oldest. Alarms that have been saved and are no longer active can only be displayed on the UltraCella Service terminal, but can be downloaded both from the terminal and the LED interface.

• Alarm log ﬁ le name: AlarmLog.csv

1. remove the bottom frame and plug in the USB ﬂ ash drive. The red

and green LEDs on the side of the key will come on individually in sequence to indicate that the unit recognises the USB ﬂ ash drive;

2. press Prg and Set for 2 sec; the ﬁ rst menu is displayed: “HcP”;

3. press UP 4 times until reaching the “USB” menu item;

4. press Set; the ﬁ rst submenu is shown: “rcP”;

5. press UP to access the “ALG” submenu;.

6. press SET to conﬁ rm the download of the saved alarms. The message

“ALG” will ﬂ ash during the download procedure; at the end, “ALG” will stop ﬂ ashing and the green LED next to the USB port will come on, indicating the end of the procedure; if for some reason the procedure

is not successful, the alarm icon

will be shown on the display;

7. unplug the key; to exit the “ALG” menu, press PRG twice.

Note: If for some reason the procedure is not successful, when

exiting the menu, as well as the alarm icon

on the display, the error message “ALM” will be displayed. The error message will be cleared the next time the alarms are downloaded successfully or when restarting the controller.

Example: alarms saved starting 2 April 2014 at 10:30:00. The alarm log was downloaded to the USB ﬂ ash drive at 16:22:45 on the same day. Start -> alarm activated Stop -> alarm reset

TIME ID NAME EVENT VAR1 VAR2 2014-04-02 T10:30:00+00:00 11 ALARM_Ed1.Active Start 2014-04-02 T16:22:45+00:00 11 ALARM_Ed1.Active Stop

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

3.5.6 Information

In the information menu you can view the software release.

After entering the multifunction menu (see chapter 3.4), select with UP / DOWN the message “InF”.

1 2

Fig. 3.e

Procedure:

1. press Set: the message “vEr” appears regarding the software revision;

2. press Set once again: the software revision will appear (e.g. 1.7);

3. press one or more times Prg to return to standard display .

Note: the ﬁ gure refers to the screens on models with single row

display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*, as well as the message indicated, during navigation the display shows the scrolling message “Application version” on the second row

3.5.7 Data logging function

UltraCella introduces the data logging function to cold room control, oﬀ ering the possibility to record the temperature or the humidity read by two probes.

How to download the ﬁ le with variables recorded by UltraCella:

1. remove the bottom frame and insert the USB ﬂ ash drive. The red and

green LEDs next to the ﬂ ash drive will come on once in sequence to indicate the that unit has recognised the USB ﬂ ash drive;

2. press Prg and Set for 2 s; the ﬁ rst menu will be displayed: “HcP”

3. press UP or DOWN until reaching the “LoG” menu item;

4. press SET to conﬁ rm the download of the recorded variables (log ﬁ le) to

the USB ﬂ ash drive. The message “LoG” will ﬂ ash during downloading; at the end, “LoG” will stop ﬂ ashing to indicate that the download has been completed; if the procedure fails for some reason, the alarm icon

will be shown on the display;

5. remove the ﬂ ash drive; to exit the “LoG” menu, press PRG and/or SET.

Note: the ﬁ gure refers to the screens on models with single row

display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*, as well as the message indicated, during navigation the display shows the scrolling message “recorder” on the second row.

Note: if the procedure fails for some reason, when exiting the

menu, as well as the alarm icon

the error message “LoG” will also be shown on the display. The message error will be cleared after the next correct download or when restarting the controller.

When the probes to be recorded are suitably conﬁ gured through the parameters tr1 and tr2 and the sample time through the parameter trc, the unit starts recording the variables every trc minutes (sample time) for a maximum period of 2 years each. After the second year, the controller overwrites the oldest data saved. The variables log is available as a csv ﬁ le via USB ﬂ ash drive, which can be analysed in Excel or other widely-available programs.

USB key

Fig. 3.f

To activate the data logging function, the probe/probes to be recorded must be conﬁ gured (up to max 2) through the parameters tr1 and tr2. The sample time (for both the variables) is selectable between 2 and 60 minuts (default 5).

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

tr1

First temperature to be recorded selection 0 = no log 1 = Sv 2 = Sm (sonda letta da B1) 3 = Sr 4 = Sd1 5 = Sd2 6 = Sc 7 = SA 8 = Su (humidity probe)

008-

tr2 Second temperature to be

recorded selection 0 = no log 1 = Sv 2 = Sm (sonda letta da B1) 3 = Sr 4 = Sd1 5 = Sd2 6 = Sc 7 = SA 8 = Su (humidity probe)

008-

trc Sample time temperature

recording

5 2 60 min

• Channels recorded: two probes selected through tr1 and tr2

parameters

• Start logging: as soon as parameter tr1/tr2 is set to a value >0. The

instant the setting is conﬁ rmed is recorded in the log under event name “Start”

• Sample time: trc (minutes) for both the variables

• Data logging duration: depends on the sampling time trc and the

maximum number of samples Nrec that UltraCella can record (209000), based on the following formula:

Data logging duration = Nrec * trc

Sampling time (trc) Data logging duration

2 min 290 days 5 min

726 days (around 2 years)

10 min 1451 days (around 4 years) 30 min

4353 days (around 8 years)

60 min 8708 days (around 24 years)

• Data extraction: any USB ﬂ ash drive available on the market can be

used

• Extracted log ﬁ le names: Log_UltraCella_1.csv for the ﬁ rst variable

selected through the parameter tr1, Log_UltraCella_2.csv for the second variable selected through the parameter tr2

• Other events: as well as the “Start” event, the log also records “Stop”

events (tr1=0 or tr2=0) and “Boot” (starting or restarting the controller)

• Log data format: the data is organised in columns: date (in standard

ISO 8601 format) , type of event, value of the variable specify as Src1 (ﬁ rst variable) and Src2 (second variable)

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

Example: recording temperature probe Sv started on 2 April 2014 at 17:19:49. The data were extracted by USB ﬂ ash drive at 18:10 on the same day.

TIME EVENT Sv_Probe

2014-04-02T17:19:49+00:00 Boot 0 2014-04-02T17:24:49+00:00 25,2 2014-04-02T17:29:49+00:00 25,0 2014-04-02T17:34:49+00:00 24,6 2014-04-02T17:39:49+00:00 24,1 2014-04-02T17:44:49+00:00 21,9 2014-04-02T17:49:49+00:00 18,8 2014-04-02T17:54:49+00:00 15,1 2014-04-02T17:59:49+00:00 12,7 2014-04-02T18:04:49+00:00 10,1 2014-04-02T18:09:49+00:00 7,3

Tab. 3.g

3.5.8 UltraCella software update from LED display interface

Starting from software release 1.5, the UltraCella software can also be updated from the LED interface, as well as from the UltraCella Service terminal.

The upgrade.ap1 ﬁ le needed to perform the update from the UltraCella LED interface must only be supplied by CAREL personnel.

1. Create an “upgrade” folder in the main directory on the USB ﬂ ash

drive. Copy the upgrade.ap1 ﬁ le to the new folder;

2. remove the bottom frame and plug in the USB ﬂ ash drive. The red

and green LEDs on the side of the key will come on individually in sequence to indicate that the unit recognises the USB ﬂ ash drive;

3. press Prg and Set for 2 sec; the ﬁ rst menu is displayed: “HcP”;

4. press UP or DOWN until reaching the “SOF” menu item;

5. press SET to conﬁ rm the software update. The message “SOF” will

ﬂ ash during the update; at the end, “SOF” will stop ﬂ ashing, indicating the end of the procedure; if for some reason the procedure is not

successful, the alarm icon

will be shown on the display;

6. unplug the key; to exit the “SOF” menu, press PRG and/or SET

Note: The ﬁ gure refers to navigation on models with single-row display, WB000S%. On models with double row display, WB000D%, as well as the message described above, during the update the message “Software update” also scrolls on the second row.

Note: If for some reason the procedure is not successful, when

exiting the menu, as well as the alarm icon

on the display, the error message “SOF” will be displayed. In this case UltraCella retains the previously installed software. The error message will be cleared the next time the software is updated successfully or when restarting the controller.

3.6 Message language selection

The only messages that change according to the selected language are those shown on the UltraCella Service terminal screens (PGDEWB0FZ*).

Selecting the language

1. On the UltraCella Service terminal, access the multifunction menu by

pressing the UP button;

2. The HACCP icon is displayed. Press UP or DOWN until reaching the “i”

icon (information);

3. Press SET to access the language setting;

4. Select the desired language (in software release 1.6, the languages

available are Italian, English, German, French and Spanish) by pressing UP or DOWN. Press SET to conﬁ rm. The change is eﬀ ective immediately;

5. Press ESC twice to exit the language selection menu and return to

the main screen

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

4. COMMISSIONING

4.1 First commissioning

After wiring the electrical connections and the power supply (see installation chapter), the operations required for commissioning the UltraCella control system depend on the type of interface used. Refer to some parameters such as:

1. Set-point and diﬀ erential;

2. Probes and digital inputs conﬁ guration;

3. Selection of the type of defrost and fans operation;

4. Cold room light management.

Types of interfaces:

• board with LED display: parameters conﬁ guration is performed using

the display and the keyboard based on the procedure described in chap.3 “parameters change”. Alternatively, you can connect the remote graphic terminal “UltraCella Sevice Terminal” and enter the wizard menu for ﬁ rst commissioning (wizard);

• USB memory key: put the control on OFF and load the programming

parameters from USB memory key (uPd command, UPLOAD, see Chapter 3);

• supervisor: in order to facilitate the launch of a large number of controls

UltraCella using only the supervisor you can limit the operation of the ﬁ rst commissioning to the serial address setting. The conﬁ guration is postponed to a later time using the supervisor.

After the conﬁ guration you can enable the control of the cold room by pressing the ON/OFF key.

4.2 Parameters to be set for the commissioning

Par Description Categ. Def Min Max UoM

St Set point CtL 0 r1 r2 °C/°F rd Diﬀ erential CtL 2.0 0.1 20 °C/°F /P Type B1 to B3 Pro 0 0 2 /A2 B2 conﬁ guration Pro 1 0 3 /A3 B3 conﬁ guration Pro 0 0 5 /P4 Type B4 Pro 0 0 2 /A4 B4 conﬁ guration Pro 0 0 4 /P5 Type B5 Pro 0 0 1 /A5 B5 conﬁ guration Pro 0 0 5 A5 Digital input conﬁ guration 2 (DI2) ALM 0 0 15 A9 Digital input conﬁ guration 3 (DI3) ALM 0 0 15 d0 Type of defrost dEF 0 0 3 dt1 End defrost temperature, main

evaporator

dEF 4.0 -50.0 200.0 °C/°F

dP1 Maximum defrost duration dEF 30 1 250 min dd Dripping time after defrost (fans

oﬀ )

dEF 2 0 30 min

Fd Post dripping time (fans oﬀ ) Fan 1 0 30 min F3 Evaporator fan during defrost

0/1=on/oﬀ

Fan 1 0 1 -

c12 Compressor safety for door switch

0 = disable door management

doL 5 0 5 min

d8d Compressor restart time for door

switch

doL 30 c12 240 min

A3 Disable door microswitch

0=enabled 1=disabled

doL 1 0 1 -

tLi Light on with door open doL 120 0 240 min A4 Light management

0 = door switch + light key 1 = light key

doL 0 0 1 -

c1 Minimum time between

compressor starts

CmP 6 0 30 min

c2 Minimum compressor oﬀ time CmP 3 0 15 min c3 Minimum compressor on time CmP 3 0 15 min

Tab. 4.a

4.3 Single digit display models cod. WB000S* commissioning

UltraCella with single row display

Fig. 4.a

1 21 2

1. First switch the controller OFF (press ON/OFF).

1 21 2

2. Press Prg for 2 sec: the password prompt is displayed (PAS).

3. Press UP and enter the password: 22.

1 21 2 1 21 2

4. Press Set: the ﬁ rst category is displayed: Pro (Probes).

5. Press Set: the ﬁ rst parameter is displayed: /21.

1 21 2

6. Press repeatedly UP to reach the parameter /P.

7. Press Set to set the value of the parameter (see settings in the parameter table).

1 21 2 1 21 2

8. Press UP to modify the value. 9. Press Set to conﬁ rm and return to the parameter code. The new value has now been saved on the controller.

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

1 21 2

10. Press UP to move to parameters /A2.../ A5; make any required settings.

11. Press Prg to return to the parameter categories.

1 21 2

12. Press UP to move to category CtL and follow the previous steps to set St and the following parameters.

4.4 Double digit display models cod. WB000D* commissioning

UltraCella with double row display

Fig. 4.b

1. First switch the controller OFF (press ON/OFF).

2. Press Prg for 2 sec: the second row of the display will show “PASS” (password required).

3. Press UP/DOWN to enter the password: 22.

4. Press Set; the second row of the display will scroll the name of the ﬁ rst category of parameters: Probes.

5. Press Set: the second row of the display will scroll the code and description of the ﬁ rst parameter in the category: /21 – Probe1 meas. stab.; the ﬁ rst row of the display will show the current value of the parameter

6. Press UP repeatedly until reaching parameter /P. The second row of the display will scroll the code and description of the parameter: /P – type B1 to B3; the ﬁ rst row of the display will show the current value of the parameter

7. Press Set and UP/DOWN to set the desired value of the parameter.

8. Press Set to conﬁ rm. The new value entered is now saved on the controller.

9. Press UP to move to parameters /A2…/A5; make any required settings .

10. Press Prg to return to the categories of parameters.

11. Press UP to move to category CtL (the second row scrolls the name of the second category of parameters: Control) and follow the previous steps to set St and the subsequent parameters, as shown in the previous table and in the parameter table.

4.5 Commissioning with UltraCella Service Terminal

UltraCella Service terminal

SET

PRG

ESC

M E N U

H E L P

Multifunction menu

HACCP

UltraCella

with LED display

Fig. 4.c

If the UltraCella controller has never been conﬁ gured, as soon as the terminal is connected, the wizard is shown automatically. The Wizard menu can also be accessed to repeat the guided commissioning procedure before the ﬁ rst commissioning.

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

121

Fig. 4.d

Remove the bottom faceplate and connect the UltraCella Service Terminal to the controller.

4.5.1 First start - up

When starting for the ﬁ rst time, once the Service Tool is connected, the wizard is shown automatically. Select the desired language and then answer the questions to set the other parameters.

SET

PRG

ESC

E N U

E L P

Wizard Language: English

Up/Down: Choose language Prg/Set: 1st question

Fig. 4.e

4.5.2 Repeated commissioning procedure

The commissioning procedure can be repeated by accessing the Wizard menu.

SET

PRG

ESC

E N U

H E L P

03/12/13 Setpoint 17:52:30 0.0 °C

OFF

Fig. 4.f

1.Switch the controller OFF (press DOWN and select the On/Oﬀ icon; press Set twice and then UP to switch the controller OFF; press Esc twice to exit)

SET

PRG

ESC

E N U

H E L P

Parameters Modification Password: 1234

Fig. 4.g

2. To enter programming mode: Press Prg and enter the password: 1234

SET

PRG

ESC

E L P

Parameters Categ. 1/16 1-Probes

2-Control 3-Compressor

Fig. 4.h

3. Press DOWN until reaching the “Wizard” menu

SET

PRG

ESC

M E N U

E L P

Parameters Categ. 16/16 14-EVDice

15-Three-phases 16-Wizard

Fig. 4.i

4. Conﬁ rm by selecting Set.

SET

PRG

ESC

M E N U

E L P

YES

Wizard Do you want to use the Wizard to configure the cold room ?

Fig. 4.j

5. Press Up and SET to enter the guided commissioning procedure.

4.6 Main function commissioning

4.6.1 Set-point and diﬀ erential

The reference output is the compressor output (CMP). The set point and diﬀ erential determine the compressor activation and deactivation temperatures. The control probe is the virtual probe Sv. At start-up it corresponds to probe B1. If the temperature inside the cold room is not uniform the control can be set (by placing /4> 0) to regulate on a “virtual” probe obtained from the average of two measurement points (probes B1 and B2).

CMP

OFF

Fig. 4.k

Key

St Set point Sv Virtual probe rd Diﬀ erential CMP Compressor

Note: see par. "6.3 Set point" for the options related to the regulation of the control set point

4.6.2 Probes conﬁ guration

The UltraCella controls have a maximum of 5 analog inputs, of which 3 can be conﬁ gured as temperature probes (NTC probes, NTC high temperature probes, PT1000), the fourth as temperature probe or input 0 ... 10 V, the ﬁ fth can be conﬁ gured as input 4 ... 20 mA or 0...5 Vrat.

Analogue Inputs Type

B1 B2 B3

NTC10 kΩ a 25°C, range -50T90°C, NTC extended range, NTC50 kΩ a 25°C, range 0T150°C; PT1000, 1000 Ω a 0°C, range -50T90°C

B4 NTC10 kΩ a 25°C, range -50T90°C,

NTC extended range, NTC50 kΩ a 25°C, range 0T150°C 0…10 V

B5 4…20 mA

0...5Vrat

0.5...4.5Vrat

Tab. 4.b

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

Below the parameters with the selection:

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

/P Type B1 to B3

0 = NTC Standard Range -50T90°C 1 = NTC Enhanced Range 0T150°C 2 = PT1000

002 -

/P4 Type B4

0 = NTC Standard Range -50T90°C 1 = NTC Enhanced Range 0T150°C 2 = 0 to 10 V

002 -

/P5 Type B5

0 = 4 to 20 mA 1 = 0 to 5 Vrat 2= 0.5...4.5Vrat

001 -

4.6.3 Probes function assignment B1, B2, B3, B4, B5

The control, inside the cold room, can use the probes:

• outlet;

• intake;

• defrost, placed in the evaporator, preferably where the ice resides most;

• condenser, used to protect the compressor due to high discharge

temperature, associated with fowling of the condenser or fan failure.

Probe B1 is conﬁ gured as environment probe and its function cannot be changed.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

/A2 Conﬁ guration B2

0 Absent 1 Defrost probe 1 (Sd1) 2 Intake probe (Sr) 3 Generic temperature probe 2

103 -

/A3 Conﬁ guration B3

0 Absent 1 Defrost probe 2 (Sd2) 2 Cond. probe (Sc) 3 Defrost probe 1 (Sd1) 4 Ambient probe (SA) 5 Generic temperature probe 3

005 -

/A4 Conﬁ guration B4

0 Absent 1 Ambient temperature probe (SA) 2 Humidity probe 3 Generic temperature probe 4 4 Generic humidity probe 4

004 -

/A5 Conﬁ guration B5

0 Absent 1 Humidity probe 2 Generic temperature probe 5 3 Generic humidity probe 5 4 Generic pressure probe 5 5 Condensing pressure probe (Scp)

005 -

For probe B4, if conﬁ gured as a 0 to 10 V input (/P4=2) and for probe B5, the logical control values corresponding to the physical end scale values can be conﬁ gured.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

/4L

Probe 4 minimum value (only for 0...10V input)

0 -50,0 /4H -

/4H Probe 4 maximum value (only for 0...10V

input)

100,0 /4L 200,0 -

/5L Probe 5 minimum value 0,0 -50,0 /5H /5H Probe 5 maximum value 100,0 /5L 999 -

Example: if input B5 is connected to a pressure sensor with 4 to 20 mA output and a range of -1 to 9.3 bars, set

- /5L = -1.0

- /5H = 9.3 In this case, when the probe reads a value of 12 mA, the value associated with the reading of B5 will be 4.1 (middle of the scale).

4.6.4 Probes reading correction

The values read by the probes can be corrected by adding/removing an oﬀ set from the measure with the parameters /c1, ..., /c5.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

/c1 Oﬀ set B1 0 -20.0 20.0 °C/°F /c2 Oﬀ set B2 0 -20.0 20.0 °C/°F /c3 Oﬀ set B3 0 -20.0 20.0 °C/°F /c4 Oﬀ set B4 0 -20.0 20.0 °C/°F/%rH /c5 Oﬀ set B5 0 -20.0 20.0 °C/°F/%rH/bar/psi

The oﬀ set may need to comply with HACCP requirements. In this case, the oﬀ set should be calculated using a calibrated instrument. Setting these parameters aﬀ ects the measurement and the value shown on the display, and consequently may not be allowed. If in doubt, contact the food safety manager or site manager.

min max

Fig. 4.l

Key

T1 Temperature measured by the probe T2 Temperature measured by the probe after oﬀ set correction AOﬀ set value min, max Measurement range

HACCP - CAUTION

The modiﬁ cation of these parameters, inﬂ uencing the measurement and display, may not be allowed in some applications or might require special approval because it may aﬀ ect the operation of HACCP systems. If in doubt, consult the person in charge of food safety or the manager of the plant.

4.6.5 Digital inputs

Note: the digital input 1(DI1) is used by default for the door

switch, however this be can be conﬁ gured as DI2 and DI3 If the door switch is not used (for example, not connected to DI1), it can be disabled by setting A3=1 and A11=5 (default value) or associating DI1 with another function, see Table 4b.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

A3 Disable door microswitch

0= enabled 1= disabled

101 -

If A3=0 and the door microswitch is not connected, the controller will activate the "door open" icon. To prevent incorrect messages being displayed, set A3=1 or short-circuit pin 21 (DI1) to one of the GND pins.

You can link multiple contacts to multifunction digital inputs to activate various functions, such as alarm, enable / start defrost, low pressure, etc..

Caution: in order to ensure the safety of the unit in the event of

serious alarms, all the electromechanical safety devices required to guarantee correct operation must be ﬁ tted on the unit.

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

Functions of digital inputs DI1, DI2 and DI3

PARAMETERS A11, A5, A9

Selection Contacts

OPEN

0 = Not active - 1 = Immediate external alarm active not active 2 = Do not select - 3 = Enable defrost not enabled enabled 4 = Start defrost not active active 5 = Door switch active inactive 6= Remote On/Oﬀ OFF ON 7 = Change set point (r4-r5) from sw.. inactive active 8 = Low pressure switch low pressure

status

normal status

9 = Do not select - 10 = Do not select - 11 = Do not select - 12 = AUX activation deactivated activated 13 = Do not select - 14 = Continuous cycle activation contact opening

(deactivation)

contact closing

(activation) 15 = Alarm from generic function (DI2 and DI3 only)

active/inactive active/inactive

16 = Start/stop defrost stop start 17 = Serious alarm active inactive

Tab. 4.c

Below are indicated the parameters used to explain the selections for A5 and A9.

1 = Immediate external alarm

Application: external alarm that requires immediate activation (for

example, high pressure alarm or compressor thermal overload). The activation of the alarm:

1. • shows the message on the display (IA);

• activates the buzzer, if enabled;

• activates the alarm relay, if selected;

2. involves the following actions on the actuators:

• compressor: operates depending on the values assigned to

parameter A6 (stop compressor on external alarm).

• fans: continue to operate according to the fan parameters (F).

Note:

• when stopping the compressor, the minimum ON time (c3) is ignored.

• if more than 1 input is conﬁ gured on immediate alarm, the alarm is

generated when one of the inputs is opened.

2 = Do not select

3 = Enable defrost

Application: Any defrost request arriving when the contact is open will

remain pending until the contact closes.

A11/A5/A9 = 3

Contacts Defrost

Open Not enabled Closed Enabled (defrost start is still determined by the control) Close with active defrost

when the digital input is opened, the defrost is immediately stopped and the unit restarts normal operation (without performing the dripping or postdripping phases). The LED starts ﬂ ashing to indicate that the defrost request is pending, waiting for the next enabling signal (closing of the contact), when the defrost will be performed completely.

Tab. 4.d

Note: this function is useful to prevent defrosts on the units accessible by the public during opening times.

4 = Start defrost from external contact

Application: this feature is useful in case you need to perform synchronized

defrost across multiple units or otherwise manually controlled by an external contact. To perform the defrosts, connect a cyclical, mechanical or electronic timer to the digital input. You can connect multiple units at the same timer and set diﬀ erent values for the parameter d5 (defrost delay from multifunction input) to avoid simultaneous defrosts.

Timer

Defrost

UNIT 1

UNIT 2

UNIT 3

Defrost

dP(1)

d5(2)

d5(3)

dP(2) dP(3)

OFF

Fig. 4.m

Key

dP Maximum defrost duration UNIT 1…3 Unit 1…3 d5 Defrost delay from digital input t Time

5 = door switch (see parameter A3)

6=On/Oﬀ remote

The digital input can also be programmed as a remote ON/OFF switch. When the control is set to OFF:

• the temperature is displayed alternately with the message “OFF”, the

internal timer relative to the parameter dI is updated. If dI expires when the unit is OFF, a defrost is performed when the unit is switched on again;

• the auxiliary relays remain active set as an auxiliary output and light,

the other auxiliary outputs are oﬀ ;

• the buzzer and the alarm relay are oﬀ ;

• the control does not perform the control functions, defrosts, continuous

cycle, temperature alarm signalling and all the other functions;

• the compressor protection times are respected.

At control restart, all functions are reactivated, except:

• defrost at start-up;

• compressor and fan delay at start-up.

Note: The ON/OFF from external digital input has priority over the keypad and the supervisor.

7 = Change set point (r4-r5) from switch

The temperature and/or humidity set point can be changed by digital input, adding a temperature (r4) and/or humidity (r5) oﬀ fset:

Digital input open Digital input closed Current set point (temperature) = St Current set point (temperature) =

St + r4

Current set point (humidity) = StH Current set point (humidity) = StH

+ r5

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

When the digital input (e.g. DI2 A5=7) is closed, the current set point (e.g. temperature) changes from St to St+r4 and the SET button on the display (or “Set point” on the pGD) starts ﬂ ashing. When the same digital input is open, the set point returns to the initial value and the SET button stops ﬂ ashing.

8 = Low pressure switch

By setting A5/A9=8 you can manage the low pressure switch. The low pressure alarm “LP” is signalled when the low pressure switch is triggered:

• during normal regulation, with active compressor and pump down

function is disabled (c7=0)

• with pump-down function enabled (c7 >0), if the pump down valve is

opened and the compressor is active.

The low pressure alarm signal is delayed by the time set for parameter A7. The low pressure alarm ‘LP’ stops the compressor.

1 21 2

Æ Å

1 21 2

9, 10, 11 = Do not select

12 = Auxiliary output

Setting H1/H5 = 2 the corresponding output AUX1/ AUX2 is activated by the key AUX1/ AUX2 or from DI if set. In addition, a digital input DI1, DI2 or DI3 (set A11, A5 or A9 = 12) can be used to control AUX1 or AUX2. In this case the key and the digital input have the same priority as regards the switch on.

13 = Do not select

14 = Continuous cycle activation

Activation: passage of the contact from opened to closed; Deactivation: passage of the contact from closed to opened.

15 = Alarm from generic function

Digital inputs DI2 and DI3 can be associated with special alarms, using the generic functions, and can be activated with the input open or closed (see the paragraph on Generic functions).

16 = Start/stop defrost from external contact

Application: an external device is used to start the defrost (on closing the digital input) and subsequently stop it (on opening the digital input). When the digital input opens, the dripping time set for parameter dd must then elapse.

Note:

• if following the start of the defrost, the digital input does not open

before the time dP1 elapses, the defrost will terminate by time and alarm Ed1 will be displayed (defrost ended by timeout).

• opening of the digital input does not start the defrost only if the

defrost probe (e.g. B2) temperature is greater than dt1 (end defrost temperature on main evaporator).

• if a separate defrost is conﬁ gured on two evaporators (d13=1) and

start/stop defrost from external contact is set, both evaporators are defrosted at the same time.

17 = Serious alarm

Application: external alarm that causes the immediate deactivation of the outputs on UltraCella (except those conﬁ gured as a light/alarm) so as to prevent a dangerous situation. This can be used, for example, to stop the compressor following activation of the “Cold room occupied” alarm or to deactivate the heaters if an external protection device is activated. When the alarm is activated:

• a signal is shown on the display (‘SA’);

• the buzzer is activated, if enabled

• the alarm relay is activated, if selected;

The following actions occur on the actuators:

• immediate deactivation of all the outputs (relays), except for those

conﬁ gured as lights and/or alarms.

Note:

• when shutting down the compressor, the minimum compressor

on time (c3) and the running time relating to parameter A6 (stop compressor from external alarm) are ignored.

• if more than one digital input is conﬁ gured as a serious alarm, the

alarm is generated when just one of the inputs is open.

4.6.6 Type of defrost

UltraCella allows you to manage the following types of defrost, depending on parameter d0:

0. electric heater defrost by temperature;

1. hot gas defrost by temperature;

2. electric heater defrost by time; 3 hot gas defrost by time.

For further explanations please see chap. 6.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

d0 Type of defrost

0 heater by temperature. 1 hot gas by temperature 2 heater by time 3 hot gas by time

003 -

dt1 End of defrost temperature, main

evaporator

4.0 -50.0 200.0 °C/°F

dP1 Maximum defrost duration 30 1 250 min

4.6.7 Evaporator Fans

During the dripping periods (parameter dd > 0) and post-dripping periods (parameter Fd > 0) the evaporator fans are always oﬀ . This is useful to allow the evaporator to return to normal temperature after defrost. There is the possibility to force the start of the evaporator fans during control (parameter F2) and during defrost (parameter F3). See chap. 6

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

dd Dripping time after defrost (fans oﬀ ) 2 0 30 min F2 Fan activation time with compressor OFF 30 0 60 F3 Evaporator fan during defrost

0/1=on/oﬀ

101 -

Fd Post dripping time (fans oﬀ ) 1 0 30 min

4.6.8 Door opening

If the door is left open, the signalling control is made via the door switch (if A3=1, digital input DI1, already conﬁ gured as the door switch, is disabled). When the door is open, the evaporator fans are turned oﬀ if conﬁ gured at ﬁ xed speed (F0=0,1), otherwise operate at minimum speed deﬁ ned by parameter F7 (if F7<50) if set as variable speed fans (F0= 2); the compressor continues to operate for the time c12, then turns oﬀ . Once passed the period of time d8d from door opening, compressor and evaporator fans are running again and the error “dor” is displayed.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

c12 Compressor safety time, door switch

0 = disabled door management

5 0 5 min

d8d Compressor restart time for door switch 30 c12 240 min

Special cases refer ﬁ gure 4.n and 4.o:

• to disable door alarm, set d8d =0. If d8d = 0, c12 is also considered =0;

• to keep only phase 2 (ﬁ gure), in which the compressor is on, and to

eliminate phase 3 in which the compressor/ evaporator fan is oﬀ , set d8d=c12;

• to keep only phase 3 (ﬁ gure), c12=0;

• during phase 3 the compressor may be on if:

1. pump down is activated;

2. hot gas defrost is activated.

Note: If the door switch digital input DI1 is disabled (A3=1):

• Parameters C12 and d8d have no meaning, as the controller

cannot know whether the door is open or closed

• The door open icon will always be oﬀ

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

Compressor on

before door opening

Compressor oﬀ

before door opening

Door

switch

Door

alarm

Evaporator

fan

CMP

2 3 4

d8d

c12

OFF

open

Door

switch

Door

alarm

Evaporator

fan

CMP

2 3 4

d8d

c12

OFF

open

Fig. 4.n Fig. 4.o

Key

t Time Door_sw door switch Evap_fan Evaporator fan CMP Compressor Dor alarm Door alarm “dor”

Note: to render the time settings operational, the control must restart. Otherwise, the settings will be used only at the next use,

when the inner timers are set.

4.6.9 Compressor management

•

c1 determines the minimum time between two consecutive starts of the compressor;

• c2 sets the minimum turn oﬀ time for the compressor.

• c3 sets the minimum running time for the compressor.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

c1 Minimum time between two successive

starts of the compressor

6 0 30 min

c2 Compressor minimum switch-oﬀ time 3 0 15 min c3 Compressor minimum switch-on time 3 0 15 min

Step1

Step2

c3 c2

c11

OFF

Power_ON

OFF

Fig. 4.p

Note: c2 parameter used to ensure the balance of the pressure after the compressor stop and to avoid blocking at the next

reboot of those compressors that do not have suﬃ cient starting torque.

4.7 Light management

The light can be managed:

• from door switch (if A3=0) and/or light key;

• only from light key.

Below are indicated the involved parameters.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

tLi Light on with door open 120 0 240 min A4 Light management

0 Door switch + light key 1 Light key

001 -

Note: if the control is OFF, the light output is controlled only by

the light key. If the control is set to ON, the light is controlled by a door switch + light key or just light key according to the setting of the parameter A4.

4.7.1 Door switch + light key

If A4=1 the light is on/oﬀ only using the light key. The open/closed status of the door is ignored. If A4=0, when the cold room door is opened, the light is always on. When the door is closed, the light can be turned on or oﬀ using the light key. Once turned on, the light will automatically turn oﬀ after the time set in parameter tLi.

LIGHT CONTROL FROM DOOR SWITCH AND LIGHT KEY

Light_K

Door_sw

A4=0

tLi tLi

OFF

Fig. 4.q

Key

Light_k Light key Li Light Door_sw Door switch tLi Light turn oﬀ delay t Time

4.8 Other conﬁ guration parameters

The conﬁ guration parameters must be set during the commissioning of the controller and concern:

• date/time set;

• measurement stability of the analogue probes;

• display of the decimal point on control;

• serial address for monitoring network connection;

• ithe type of protocol on the BMS serial port for connection to the

supervisor network

• temperature (°C / °F) and pressure (bar/psi) measurement unit

• disabling of keyboard, keys and buzzer;

• display view during defrost.

Date/ time set

See example 2 in chap.3.

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

Analogue probes measuring stability

It deﬁ nes the ﬁ lter coeﬃ cient used to stabilize the temperature measurement. Low values assigned to this parameter allow a prompt response of the sensor to temperature variations, but the reading becomes more sensitive to disturbance. High values slow down the response, but guarantee greater immunity to disturbance, that is, a more stable and more precise reading.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

/21 Stability measuring probe 1 4 0 9 /22 Stability measuring probe 2 4 0 9 /23 Stability measuring probe 3 4 0 9 /24 Stability measuring probe 4 4 0 9 /25 Stability measuring probe 5 4 0 9 -

Display view

On models with single row display, P/Ns WB000S*, it is possible to show a single characteristic, selectable through /t1 parameter. On models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*, and on the UltraCella Service terminal, it is possible to show two diﬀ erent characteristics, the ﬁ rst selectable through /t1 parameter, and the second through /t2 parameter.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

/t1 Display variable 1

0 None 9 B3 1 Virtual probe 10 B4 2 Outlet probe 11 B5 3 Intake probe 12 Sc 4 Defrost probe 1 13 Variable speed

condenser fans set point

5 Defrost probe 2 6 Temp. set point 7 B1 14 Humid. set

point

8B2

1 0 13 -

/t2 Display variable 2

0 None 12 rd 1 Virtual probe 13 superheat (EVD

EVO)

2 Outlet probe 14 valve opening %

(EVD EVO)

3 Intake probe 15 valve opening

step (EVD EVO) 4 Defrost probe 1 16 Sc 5 Defrost probe 2 17 Sd1 (3PH mod.) 6 Set point 18 Sd2 (3PH mod.) 7 B1 19 Sc (3PH mod.) 8 B2 20 Variable speed

condenser fans

set point 9 B3 21 Superheat

(EVDice) 10 B4 22 Valve opening %

(EVDice) 11 B5 23 Step valve

opening (EVDice)

6 0 23 -

Serial address (parameter H0)

H0 assigns an address to check for serial connection to a supervision system and / or remote assistance.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

H0 Serial Address 193 0 247 -

Starting from software release 1.5, both CAREL and Modbus protocols are available on the BMS serial port, selected by parameter H7.

Note: H0 maximum value is 207 for CAREL protocol and 247 for Modbus protocol.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

H7 BMS serial protocol

0= CAREL protocol 1= Modbus protocol

001 -

Starting from software release 1.7, the baud rate, stop bits and parity of the BMS port can be set using parameters H10, H11 and H12; the data bits setting on the other hand remains ﬁ xed at 8.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

H10 BMS baud rate bit/s

0 1200 5 38400 1 2400 6 57600 2 4800 7 76800 3 9600 8 115200 4 19200 9 375000

409-

H11 BMS stop bits

1 1 stop bit 2 2 stop bits

212-

H12 BMS parity

1 odd 2even

002-

Note: to make the changes active, switch the unit oﬀ and on again.

Temperature unit of measure and decimal point display

The control allows:

• choosing the temperature measuring unit between Celsius (°C) and

Fahrenheit (° F) degrees;

• to enable/disable the display of the decimal point and buzzer.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

/5t Temperature unit of measure

0/1 = °C / °F

001 -

/SP Pressure unit of measure

0/1 = bar / psi

001 -

/6 Display decimal point

0/1 = yes/no

001 -

H4 Buzzer

0/1 = enabled/disabled

001 -

Disable keypad

You can inhibit some functions relating to the use of the keypad, for example, the modiﬁ cation of the parameters and the set point if the unit is accessible to the public

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

H6 Terminal keys block conﬁ guration

0 = all keys enabled. 255 = all keys disabled

0 0 255 -

Conﬁ guration table

FUNCTION par. H6

Set-point modiﬁ cation 1 Defrost 2

-4 AUX1output 8 PRG+SET (menu) 16 AUX2 output 32 On/Oﬀ management 64 Light management 128

Tab. 4.e

Example: to disable the activation functions of the outputs AUX1 and AUX2, set H6 = 8+32 = 40.

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

4.9 Ultra EVD EVO module commissioning

WM00ENNI00, WM00EUN000, WM00EUK000: Connect UltraCella to the EVD module via serial, as shown in the wiring diagram in Figure 2.k, and refer to the following parameter table for conﬁ guration of the EVD EVO driver. The module will become active when enabled by UltraCella, setting P1=1.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

P1 Enable communication with EVD EVO

module 1 = EVD EVO module enabled

001 -

WM00ENSI00, WM00ENS000, WM00EUS000, WM00EUC000:

1. Using the EVD EVO display to conﬁ gure the driver

Connect an auxiliary output on UltraCella (AUX1 or AUX2) electrically to digital input DI1 on the EVD EVO and set the parameters as follows:

• H1=7 (for AUX1) or H5=7 (for AUX2) -> delayed second compressor

• C11=0 -> second compressor activation delay = 0

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

H1 AUX1 output conﬁ guration

7 = Delayed compressor

1 0 17 -

H5 AUX2 output conﬁ guration

7 = Delayed compressor

1 0 17 -

C11 Second compressor start delay

0 = instant start with main compressor output

4 0 250 sec

In this way, the auxiliary output will be conﬁ gured as a voltage-free contact to control the compressor, suitable to be connected to digital input DI1 on the EVD EVO driver. No conﬁ guration is required on UltraCella.

2. Conﬁ guring the EVD EVO driver from UltraCella

Connect UltraCella to the EVD EVO module via serial, as shown in the wiring diagram in Figure 2.k, and refer to the following parameter table for conﬁ guration of the EVD EVO driver. The module will become active when enabled by UltraCella, setting P1=1. If connected via serial, the driver parameters can only be displayed (not modiﬁ ed) on the EVD EVO local display. Once the driver has been enabled (parameter P1=1), its parameter settings will be sent by UltraCella, in accordance with the parameter table below (only modiﬁ able from UltraCella); any parameters previously conﬁ gured on the EVD EVO display will be overwritten.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

P1 Enable communication with EVD EVO

module 1 = EVD EVO module enabled

101 -

EVD EVO parameter table

The following parameters corresponding to the EVD EVO driver can be conﬁ gured from UltraCella.

Category: EVO

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

P1 Enable communication with EVD EVO

module 0/1=disabled/enabled

001-

P1t S1 probe type

0 RAZ. 0-5V 2 4 to 20mA REMOTE 1 4 to 20mA 3 4 to 20mA EXTERNAL

003-

P1M Max value of S1 probe 12,8 -20 200 bar/

psi

P1n Min value of S1 probe -1 -20 200 Bar/

psi

PVt Valve type

1 Carel exv 12 Sporlan seh 100 2 Alco ex4 13 Sporlan seh 175 3 Alco ex5 14 Danfoss ets 12.5

- 25b 4 Alco ex6 15 Danfoss ets 50b 5 Alco ex7 16 Danfoss ets 100b 6 Alco ex8

330hz CAREL recommended

17 Danfoss ets 250

7 Alco ex8

500hz alco speciﬁ cation

18 Danfoss ets 400

8 Sporlan sei

0.5-11

19 two CAREL exv

connected together

9 Sporlan ser

1.5-20

20 Sporlan ser(i) g, j, k

10 Sporlan sei 30 21 Danfoss ccm 10-

20-30

11 Sporlan sei 50 22 Danfoss ccm 40

1 1 22 -

PH Refrigerant type

1 R22 15 R422D 29 R455A 2 R134a 16 R413A 30 R170 3 R404A 17 R422A 31 R442A 4 R407C 18 R423A 32 R447A 5 R410A 19 R407A 33 R448A 6 R507A 20 R427A 34 R449A 7 R290 21 R245FA 35 R450A 8 R600 22 R407F 36 R452A 9 R600A 23 R32 37 R508B 10 R717 24 HTR01 38 R452B 11 R744 25 HTR02 39 R513A 12 R728 26 R23 40 R454B 13 R1270 27 R1234yf 14 R417A 28 R1234ze

3 1 25 -

PrE Main regulation type

1 centralized cabinet cold room 2 self contained cabinetcold room 3 perturbated cabinet cold room 4 subcritical CO2 cabinet/cold room

214-

P0 EVD Modbus address 198 1 247 P3 Superheat setpoint 10 -72 324 K P4 Proportional gain 15 0 800 P5 Integral time 150 0 999 sec P6 Derivative time 2 0 800 sec P7 LowSH: threshold low superheat 3 -72 324 K P8 Low Superheat protection integral time 600 0 800 sec P9 LowSH: low superheat alarm delay 600 0 999 sec PL1 LOP: threshold for low temp. of evapor. -50 -60 200 °C/°F PL2 LOP: integral time 600 0 800 sec PL3 LOP: low evaporation temperature alarm delay 60 0 0 99 9 sec cP1 Open valve startup, Percentage 50 0 100 % PM1 MOP: max evap. pressure threshold 50 -60 200 °C/°F PM2 MOP: integral time 600 0 800 sec PM3 MOP: max evap. pressure alarm delay 10 0 999 sec Pdd Post defrost delay, only for single driver 10 0 60 min PSb Valve position in stand-by 0 0 100 step PMP Enable manual positioning 0 0 1 PMu Manual valve positioning 0 0 999 step Pnr Reset EVD setting 0 -> 1 Reset all EVD EVO

parameters

001-

PLt Stop smooth lines oﬀ set 2.0 0.0 10.0 °C/°F PHS Maximum smooth lines oﬀ set 15.0 0.0 50.0 °C/°F PSP Smooth lines proportional coeﬃ cient 5.0 0.0 100.0 °C/°F PSI Smooth lines integral time 120 0 1200 s PSd Smooth lines derivative time 0 0 100 s PSM Enable smooth lines (0=NO - 1=YES) 0 0 1 /

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

4.10 EVDice commissioning

Connect UltraCella to the EVDice driver via the serial line according to the wiring diagram shown in Figure 2.o, and refer to the parameter table 4.e below for conﬁ guration of the EVDice driver. UltraCella software release 1.7 features new EVDice driver management functions:

• Possibility to conﬁ gure the EVDice parameters on the UltraCella user

interface (built-in LED display or UltraCella Service terminal) and/or on the local EVDice LED display user interface.

• EVDice custom conﬁ guration protection by signature: as soon as

communication is established, UltraCella “signs” EVDice by writing a random number between 1 and 65000 to a register on the driver. This allows unique identiﬁ cation of:

- EVDice drivers that have been previously conﬁ gured

- “new” EVDice drivers (e.g. replaced due to a fault) There are three possible cases:

New installation / New system / EVDice installed following installation: in this case, the signature on UltraCella will initially be 0 -> the active parameters will be those set on EVDice, and UltraCella will generate a new signature. Proceed as follows:

1. Conﬁ rm that the EVDice is present by setting IPE=1 (communication

with EVDice enabled), or by answering “yes” to a speciﬁ c question in the wizard on the UltraCella Service terminal; UltraCella will sign the EVDice so as to create the controller-driver combination;

2. The IEC (EVDice conﬁ guration error) alarm will be activated and the

controller (and the compressor) will stop (UltraCella forces parameter ICG=0, EVDice not enabled for control). Conﬁ gure the EVDice parameters based on the application, either using the wizard, or parameter-by-parameter on the LED display interface;

3. Once all of the required EVDice parameters have been conﬁ gured, set

ICG=1 to activate control. Setting ICG=1 also resets the IEC alarm.

Replacing EVDice due to a fault / other causes:

1. UltraCella will have a signature other than 0 (as it has been previously

conﬁ gured to manage an EVDice driver), while the EVDice will have a diﬀ erent signature from the one saved on UltraCella (either 0 if new, or a number other than 0 if originating from another installation). In this case, the initially active parameters will be those set on UltraCella (the parameters on UltraCella corresponding to the EVDice driver will be copied to the EVDice). Proceed as follows:

• The IEM alarm (EVDice error mismatch) is active to warn the user that

an element in the system has been changed. If necessary, modify the EVDice parameters based on the application, either using the wizard, or parameter-by-parameter on the LED display interface;

• The controller is will active even when the IEM alarm is active; to

disable the alarm, press

on the UltraCella LED display.

2. The signature on UltraCella will be equal to 0 (as it is new or has not

been previously conﬁ gured to communicate with an EVDice driver), while EVDice will have a signature (signature other than 0). In this case, the initially active parameters will be those set on EVDice (the parameters corresponding to the EVDice driver will be copied to UltraCella). The case is identical to a new installation / new system:

• Conﬁ rm that the EVDice is present by setting IPE=1 (communication

• The IEC (EVDice conﬁ guration error) alarm will be activated and the

• Once all of the required EVDice parameters have been conﬁ gured, set

ICG=1 to activate control. Setting ICG=1 also resets the IEC alarm.

Replacing UltraCella due to a fault / other causes: The signature on UltraCella will be equal to 0 (as it is new or has not been previously conﬁ gured to communicate with an EVDice driver), while EVDice will have a signature (signature other than 0). In this case, the initially active parameters will be those set on EVDice (the parameters corresponding to the EVDice driver will be copied to UltraCella). The case is identical to a new installation / new system.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

IPE Enable EVDice communication

0/1 = disabled / enabled

001-

ICG Enable EVDice control

0/1 = disabled / enabled

001-

Note: when IPE=0 (communication with EVDice disabled), the

only parameters visible on the UltraCella built-in LED display are: IPE, IrE (EVDice operating mode), IP3 (superheat set point), PH (type of refrigerant) and In1 (EVDice serial address from UltraCella)

Note: the signature on EVDice can be set to zero using the reset

procedure on the built-in LED interface (see EVDice manual +0300037EN)

Note: the above are valid for EVDice ﬁ rmware release 1.4;

UltraCella software release 1.7 in any case maintains compatibility with EVDice drivers featuring previous ﬁ rmware releases. In particular, the IEC and IEM alarms will be always disabled, parameters IPE and ICG will have always the same value and UltraCella will not generate any signature

Note: in UltraCella software release 1.7, the EVDice ﬁ rmware

release is read-only when parameter IPE=1 (communication with EVDice enabled)

EVD ICE parameter table

The following parameters correspond to the EVD ICE driver, and are conﬁ gured on UltraCella.

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

Category: ICE

Parameter name on EVD ICE

Description Def Min Max UoM

Type Parameter

name on

UltraCella

(LED display)

Present on

UltraCella

Service pGD

Present

in wizard

(UltraCella

Service pGD)

- Enable EVD ICE /1 = not enabled/ enabled

0 0 1 - Advanced IPE

Operating mode 1=Multiplexed cabinet/cold room

2=Air-conditioner/chiller with plate heat exchanger 3=Air-conditioner/chiller with tube bundle heat exchanger 4=Air-conditioner/chiller with ﬁ nned coil heat exchanger 5=Reserved 6=Reserved

11 6

(modes 2,

3, 4, 5 and 6

can only be

selected on

UltraCella

service

pGD)

- Initial conﬁ guration

IrE

Superheat Superheat set point 11 C1 99 K Initial

conﬁ guration

IP3

Type of gas

3 1 40 - Initial

conﬁ guration

IPH

S1 Type of probe S1

1=-1 to 4.2 barg 2=0.4 to 9.3 barg 3=-1 to 9.3 barg 4=0 to 17.3 barg 5=0.85 to 34.2 barg 6=0 to 34.5 barg 7=0 to 45 barg 8=-1 to 12.8 barg 9=0 to 20.7 barg 10=1.86 to 43.0 barg 11 = Reserved

3 1 11 - Advanced IS1

CP PID: proportional gain 15 0 800 - Advanced ICP

ti PID: integral time 150 0 999 sec Advanced Iti

C1 LowSH protection: threshold 5 -9 IP3 °C/°F Advanced IC1

C2 LowSH protection: integral time 15 0 800 sec Advanced IC2

C3 LOP protection: threshold -50 -121 C5 °C/°F Advanced IC3

C4 LOP protection: integral time 0 0 800 sec Advanced IC4

C5 MOP protection: threshold 50 C3 392 °C/°F Advanced IC5

C6 MOP protection: integral time 20 0 800 sec Advanced IC6

C7 MOP protection: disable threshold 30 -121 200 °C/°F Advanced IC7

C8 Low suction temperature alarm threshold -121 -392 200 °C/°F Advanced IC8

IA Enable operating mode modiﬁ cation

0/1 = enabled/not enabled

0 0 1 - Advanced IIA

U1 Enable manual valve positioning

0/1 = enabled/not enabled

0 0 1 - Advanced IU1

U2 Manual valve position 0 0 999 step Advanced IU2

U3 Valve control steps: 1/2 = 480/960 step 1 1 2 - Advanced IU3

U4 Valve opening at start (evaporator/valve

capacity ratio)

50 0 100 % Advanced IU4

n1 Serial address 99 1 99 - Advanced In1

- Enable EVD ICE regulation 0/1 = not enabled/ enabled

0 0 1 - Advanced ICG

Note: as EVD ICE has a two digit display, when its parameters are displayed on UltraCella, the letter “I” has been added to every

parameter code: e.g. S1 -> IS1

Note: all EVD ICE parameters are visible both on the LED user interface and on the UltraCella Service terminal (pGD).

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

4.11 Ultra 3Ph Evaporator module commissioning

Ultra 3PH Evaporator module has to be conﬁ gured by UltraCella.

1. Please make sure that, inside Ultra 3PH Evaporator module, dip-switches

of I/O expansion are set as per following ﬁ gure (default setting):

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15

with oset no oset

19.2 K

9.6 K

38.4 K

57.6 K

CAREL Modbus

OFF

Address Ext. ProtBaud

Address Ext Baud Prot

Fig. 4.r

which corresponds to following conﬁ guration:

• Address = 15

• No oﬀ set

• Baudrate = 19200bit/sec

• Protocol = Modbus

2. In UltraCella, access to parameter category “3PH”

3. Make sure that ﬁ rst two parameters are set as follows (Carel default

setting):

• cH1 = 15 (Address)

• cH2 = 0 (Oﬀ set)

4. For 3PH Evaporator module, set (Carel default setting)

• cH3 = 0

5. If defrost probe and auxiliary evaporator defrost probe have to be

connected to Ultra 3PH Evaporator module, set:

• cA1 = 1

• cA2 = 1

For Ultra 3PH Evaporator module, don’t consider parameter cA3

6. Enable 3PH Evaporator module by setting:

• cEn = 1

Note: to ensure the communication between UltraCella and the expansion module, the I/O expansion network address and parameter cH1 on UltraCella must be set to the same value (default 15).

Important:

This setting of the dipswitches on the I/O expansion (corresponding to serial address 15) is active starting from November 2015 and guarantees “plug & play” communication with UltraCella controllers running software release 1.7 (default value cH1=15). Expansion modules manufactured prior to November 2015 have the default address setting as 1 (diﬀ erent dipswitch conﬁ guration than shown in the ﬁ gure). UltraCella controllers running a software release lower than 1.7 are set with cH1=1 by default. In some cases, then, the two conﬁ gurations will need to be aligned manually.

4.11.2 Parameters (UltraCella)

UltraCella has a subset of parameters dedicated to Ultra 3PH Evaporator module conﬁ guration.

Category: 3PH

Par Description Def Min Max UOM

cH1 3PH module serial address 15 1 247 cH2 3PH module oﬀ set serial address 0 0 232 cH3 Type of three phase module

0 = Evaporator 1 = Full

001-

cA1 Sd1 probe connection

0 = in UltraCella 1 = in 3PH module

001-

cA2 Sd2 probe connection

0 = in UltraCella 1 = in 3PH module

001-

cA3 Sc probe connection

(Full module only) 0 = in UltraCella 1 = in 3PH module

001-

cEn Enable 3PH mod.

0 = disable 1 = enable

001-

4.11.3 Function

Ultra 3PH Evaporator Module has to be combined with UltraCella controls (P/Ns WB000S% or WB000D%). Module has inside high power actuators to handle directly three-phase loads of the evaporator, but logic and regulation algorithms are inside UltraCella. In the table below details of where probes and loads can be connected.

Note:

• Although three-phase loads have to be physically connected to Ultra

3PH Evaporator module, UltraCella maintains its standard conﬁ guration of relays.

Input

Connected

UltraCella Ultra 3PH Evaporator

module

Ambient probe

Defrost probe Sd1

cA1 = 0

cA1 = 1

Defrost probe auxiliary evaporator Sd2

cA2 = 0

cA2 = 1

Output UltraCella

Ultra 3PH Evaporator

module

Compressor command / Condensing unit enabling / Solenoid valve

3

(1PH)

Defrost heaters

(1PH)

(3PH)

Evaporator fans

(1PH)

(3PH)

Light

(1PH)

AUX1

(1PH)

AUX2

(1PH)

Tab. 4.f

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

4.12 Ultra 3Ph Full module commissioning

Ultra 3PH Full module has to be conﬁ gured by UltraCella.

1. Please make sure that, inside Ultra 3PH Full module, dip-switches of

I/O expansion are set as per following ﬁ gure (default setting):

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15

with oset no oset

19.2 K

9.6 K

38.4 K

57.6 K

CAREL Modbus

OFF

Address Ext. ProtBaud

Address Ext Baud Prot

Fig. 4.s

which corresponds to following conﬁ guration:

• Address = 15

• No oﬀ set

• Baudrate = 19200bit/sec

• Protocol = Modbus

2. In UltraCella, access to parameter category “3PH”

3. Make sure that ﬁ rst two parameters are set as follows (Carel default

setting):

• cH1 = 15 (Address)

• cH2 = 0 (Oﬀ set)

4. For 3PH Full expansion module, set

• cH3 = 1

5. If defrost probe and auxiliary evaporator defrost probe have to be

connected to Ultra 3PH Full module, set:

• cA1 = 1

• cA2 = 1

6. If condenser probe has to be connected to Ultra 3PH Full module, set:

• cA3 = 1

7. Enable 3PH Full module by setting:

• cEn = 1

Note: to ensure the communication between UltraCella and the expansion module, the I/O expansion network address and parameter cH1 on UltraCella must be set to the same value (default 15).

Important: this setting of the dipswitches on the I/O expansion

(corresponding to serial address 15) is active starting from November 2015 and guarantees “plug & play” communication with UltraCella controllers running software release 1.7 (default value cH1=15). Expansion modules manufactured prior to November 2015 have the default address setting as 1 (diﬀ erent dipswitch conﬁ guration than shown in the ﬁ gure). UltraCella controllers running a software release lower than 1.7 are set with cH1=1 by default. In some cases, then, the two conﬁ gurations will need to be aligned manually.

4.12.1 Parameters (UltraCella)

UltraCella ha un sottoinsieme di parametri dedicati alla conﬁ gurazione del modulo Ultra 3PH Full.

Par Description Def Min Max UoM

cH1 3PH module serial address 15 1 247 cH2 3PH module oﬀ set serial address 0 0 232 cH3 Type of three phase module

0 = Evaporator 1 = Full

001-

cA1 Sd1 probe connection

0 = in UltraCella 1 = in 3PH module

001-

cA2 Sd2 probe connection

0 = in UltraCella 1 = in 3PH module

001-

cA3 Sc probe connection

(Full module only) 0 = in UltraCella 1 = in 3PH module

001-

cEn Enable 3PH mod.

0 = disable 1 = enable

001-

4.12.2 Function

Ultra 3PH Full Module has to be combined with UltraCella controls (P/ Ns WB000S% or WB000D%). Module has inside high power actuators to handle directly three-phase loads of the condensing and evaporator units, but logic and regulation algorithms are inside UltraCella. In the table below details of where probes and loads can be connected.

Nota:

• Although three-phase loads have to be physically connected to Ultra

3PH Full module, UltraCella maintains its standard conﬁ guration of relays.

Input

Connected

UltraCella Ultra 3PH Full module

Ambient probe

Defrost probe Sd1

cA1 = 0

cA1 = 1

Defrost probe auxiliary evaporator Sd2

cA2 = 0

cA2 = 1

Condensing probe Sc

cA3 = 0

cA3 = 1

Uscita UltraCella Ultra 3PH Full module

Compressor command

3

(1PH)

(3PH)

Defrost heaters

(1PH)

(3PH)

Evaporator fans

(1PH)

(3PH)

Light

(1PH)

AUX1

(1PH)

AUX2

(1PH)

Tab. 4.g

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

5. OUTPUTS CONFIGURATION AND PROTECTIONS

5.1 Analogue output

It is available analog output Y1, to drive the evaporator fans designed to be operated with input 0 ... 10 V. See the chapter 6.9.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

HO1 Conﬁ guration output Y1

0 Not active 1 Modulating output (generic

function)

2 Variable speed evaporator fans set

on Sd probe

3 Variable speed condenser fans

003 -

5.2 Digital Outputs

5.2.1 Delay start for compressor output

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

c0 Compressor/ fan start delay at power on 0 0 15 min

• c0: from the moment in which the control is powered-up, turning

on the compressor and the evaporator fan is delayed by a time (in

minutes) equal to the value assigned to this parameter. This delay

helps to protect the compressor against repeated starts in the case of

frequent power failures.

Note: for the other protection parameters (c1, c2, c3) see chapter 4.

5.2.2 Safety devices for outputs with diﬀ erent relays

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

c11 Second compressor start delay 4 0 250 s

• c11 sets the activation delay between the ﬁ rst and the second

compressor (or between the ﬁ rst and the second step of the

compressor).

Step1

Step2

c3 c2

c11

OFF

Power_ON

OFF

Fig. 5.a

Key

Step1 Step 1 compressor Step2 Step 2 compressor t Time

5.2.3 Output operation AUX1/AUX2

The AUX1 and AUX2 outputs can be associated with diﬀ erent functions, such as alarm, auxiliary output controlled by AUX button, the pump down valve, condenser fan, compressor, second compressor with rotation. For further explanations, please consult chapter 3.2.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

H1 AUX1 output conﬁ guration

0 Normally energised alarm 1 Normally de-energised alarm 2 Activate from AUX button or DI 3 Activate collection pan heater 4 Auxiliary evaporator defrost 5 Pump down valve 6 Condenser fan 7 Delayed compressor 8 Control output 1 ON/OFF 9 Control output 2 ON/OFF 10 Alarm output 1 11 Alarm output 2 12 Do not select 13 Second compressor step 14 Second compressor step with

rotation 15 Humidity output 16 Reverse mode output 17 Output managed by time band 18 Control output 3 ON/OFF 19 Reverse output - dehumidiﬁ cation 20 External dehumidiﬁ er 21 Reverse mode output 2

1 0 21 -

H5 AUX2 output conﬁ guration

See H1

1 0 17 -

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

6. CONTROL

6.1 Switching the controller ON and OFF

The state of ON/OFF can be controlled by more than one source, keyboard, digital input and supervisor. When the controller is oﬀ , the display will show the temperature selected for parameter /t1 alternating with the OFF message. The digital input can be used to switch the controller on/ oﬀ , setting parameter A5/A9 to “6”. The activation state of ON / OFF from digital input has priority over the one from the supervisor and keyboard.

Origin Priority Notes

Digital input 1 Disable On/Oﬀ from keypad and supervisor Keyboard 2 Supervisor 3

Tab. 6.a

6.2 Virtual probe

The control output of the controller is the compressor output. The control probe is the ambient probe B1 (default setting), while the probes B2, B3, B4, B5 may be associated with the functions of defrost probe 1/2, outlet probe, intake probe, condenser probe. If the cold room is very large you should also use a second probe to control the temperature of the room. The controller will activate the compressor based on the requirements of the virtual probe (Sv), obtained from weighed average of the 2 probes (B1, B2).

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

/4 Virtual probe composition

0 = probe B1 100 = probe B2

0 0 100 -

The /4 parameter is used to determine the virtual probe (Sv) as a weighted average of the control sensor probe B1 and B2, according to the formula:

Sv=

[(B1*(100-/4)+B2*/4]

100

UltraCella

Fig. 6.a

Key

B1 Outlet probe B2 Intake probe

6.3 Set point

The reference output is the compressor (CMP). The controller can operate in two diﬀ erent modes, that can be selected using parameter r3:

• direct with defrost;

• direct without defrost;

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

St Set point 0 r1 r2 °C/°F rd Diﬀ erential 2.0 0.1 20 °C/°F r1 Minimum set point -50 -50 r2 °C/°F r2 Maximum set point 60 r1 200 °C/°F r3 Operating mode

0 Direct with defrost 1 Direct without defrost

001 -

CMP

OFF

Fig. 6.b

Key

St Set point rd Diﬀ erential Sv Virtual probe CMP Compressor

If you have activated the second compressor output (H1, H5 = 13, 14) on AUX output, the activation of the compressor is at St + rd/2 and that of the auxiliary compressor AUX in St + rd, according to the ﬁ gure below.

CMP

AUX

rd/2 rd/2

OFF

Fig. 6.c

Key

St Set point rd Diﬀ erential Sv Virtual probe CMP Compressor AUX Auxiliary output

The control set point, in normally operating conditions, is indicated by parameter St. This value may however change based on other algorithms:

• Change set point from digital input (St+r4 and/or StH+r5)

• Change set point from time band (St+r4 and/or StH+r5)

• Set point variation by ramp (variable set point)

with the following priority:

Priority Function Control set

point value

1 Set point variation from digital input

(A5/A9=7)

St+r4 - StH+r5

2 Set point variation by time band St+r4 - StH+r5 3 Set point variation (ramps) Variable

according to parameters PS1, PS2, PS3 and PH1, PH2, PH3

4 Set point by parameter St St

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

6.3.1 Set point variation from digital input

With UltraCella, the control set point can be changed using digital inputs DI2 and DI3. This function may be useful in applications where the control set point can be increased when the store is not open to the public (for example, at night), thus guaranteeing energy savings and the certainty that the product is ready for display and sale when needed. Digital input DI2 is associated with parameter A5, while digital input DI3 is associated with parameter A9. To enable set point variation from digital input, set A5=7 (for DI2) or A9=7 (for DI3).

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

A5 Conﬁ guration of digital input 2 (DI2)

7 = set point variation

0 0 15 -

A9 Conﬁ guration of digital input 3 (DI3)

7 = set point variation

0 0 15 -

When the digital input is active (closed), the control set point will be the sum of the values of parameters St and r4; when the digital input is not active (open), the control set point will be the value set for parameter St (normal operation).

• DI2 / DI3 not active (open) -> control set point = St

• DI2 / DI3 active (close) -> control set point = St + r4

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

r4 Set point oﬀ set 3.0 -60 60 °C/°F r5 Humidity set point oﬀ set 0.0 -50.0 50.0 %

Note: when change set point is enabled and the current set point is St+r4 (and/or Sth +r5), the SET button ﬂ ashes to indicate that

the control set point is not the value indicated by parameter St or StH.

Note: if the second row of the display shows the set point (/t2 =

6, on models where featured), the value displayed will be the eﬀ ective control set point (therefore, either St or St + r4, depending on the status of the digital input)

6.3.2 Set point variation by time band

With UltraCella, the control set point can also be changed based on time bands, using the RTC ﬁ tted on the device. The function is similar to the one described in the previous paragraph, however this is more useful when needing to change the set point repeatedly at ﬁ xed times. When the time band is active, the control set point will be the sum of the values of parameters St and r4.

• Time band not active -> control set point = St or StH

• Time band active -> control set point = St + r4 or StH + r5

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

r4 Set point oﬀ set 3.0 -60 60 °C/°F r5 Humidity set point oﬀ set 0.0 -50.0 50.0 %

To activate set point variation by time band, a time band needs to be enabled by setting the following parameters:

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

dSn

Set point variation by time band: day 0 = disable 1, 2, …7 = Sunday, Monday, … Saturday 8 = Monday to Friday 9 = Monday to Saturday 10 = Saturday & Sunday 11 = every day

0 0 11 days

hSn Start set point variation by time band:

hours

0 0 23 hours

MSn Start set point variation by time band:

minutes

0 0 59 min

hSF End set point variation by time band:

hours

0 0 23 hours

MSF End set point variation by time band:

minutes

0 0 59 min

H9 Enable set point variation by time band

0/1=disabled/enabled

001 -

Example: to have a control set point of 4°C from Monday to Saturday, 08:30 to 18:30, and 9°C at all other times, set:

• St = 4;

• r4 = 5;

• dSn = 9;

• hSn = 8;

• MSn = 30;

• hSF = 18;

• MSF = 30;

• H9 = 1 -> if H9=0 the time band will never be active

Note: when change set point is enabled and the current set point is St+r4 (and/or Sth +r5), the SET button ﬂ ashes to indicate that

the control set point is not the value indicated by parameter St or StH.

Note: if the second row of the display shows the set point (/t2 =

6, on models where featured), the value displayed will be the eﬀ ective control set point (therefore, either St or St + r4, depending on whether or not the time band is active).

6.3.3 Set point ramps

Very large cold rooms used to preserve food at below-zero temperatures (freezers) may, for logistics or constructional reasons, require concrete ﬂ oors. Initially, the cold room, and thus its ﬂ oor, which are initially at ambient temperature, if cooled to the set point in the shortest possible time (pull down), cracks may form in the ﬂ oor, causing signiﬁ cant damage. For this reason, in these types of cold rooms ramps of variable duration and intensity are used to bring the cold room to the set point over a time that is suitable for the concrete ﬂ oor. On UltraCella, ramps can be conﬁ gured that are divided into three phases. The slope of the ramp depends on the ﬁ nal temperature set point and the duration of each phase.

Phase 1: typically this is an initial cooling ramp, from ambient temperature

to a ﬁ nal temperature around 0°C, lasting several days (default 6 days). Phase 2: typically this is a phase in which the temperature reached in phase 1 is maintained, lasting several days (default 2 days) Phase 3: this is the second and ﬁ nal cooling ramp to the ﬁ nal temperature set point for storing the frozen food and, being the most critical phase, typically lasts longer (default 10 days).

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

PS1 Ramps: ﬁ nal set point, phase 1 0 -50,0 200,0 °C/°F PS2 Ramps: ﬁ nal set point, phase 2 0 -50,0 200,0 °C/°F PS3 Ramps: ﬁ nal set point, phase 3 -30,0 -50,0 200,0 °C/°F PH1 Ramps: duration of phase 1 6 0 10 days PH2 Ramps: duration of phase 2 2 0 10 days PH3 Ramps: duration of phase 3 10 0 10 days

Example: ramp starting from an ambient temperature of 30°C, the ﬁ rst phase reaches 0°C in 6 days (phase 1), maintained at 0°C for 2 days (phase

2) and ﬁ nal cooling ramp to the set point of -30°C over 10 days (phase 3).

-30 °C

-20 °C

-10 °C

0 °C

10 °C

20 °C

30 °C

0 d 00h

1 d 00h

2 d 00h

3 d 00h

4 d 00h

5 d 00h

6 d 00h

7 d 00h

8 d 00h

9 d 00h

10 d 00h

11 d 00h

12 d 00h

13 d 00h

14 d 00h

15 d 00h

16 d 00h

17 d 00h

18 d 00h

1,5 K /12 h

2,5 K /12 h

48 hours

at 0°C

internal temperature

REFRIGERATION CURVE FOR COLD ROOMS

Note: when the ramps are active, and throughout their duration,

the control set point is no longer the value indicated by parameter St, but is automatically recalculated, depending on the values set for parameters PSi and PHi, every 12 hours.

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

Note: in the event of a blackout when a ramp is in progress, when

power returns, the ramp resumes from where it was interrupted if the temperature in the cold room during the blackout has not increased by a value greater than parameter Pdt from the set point reached just before the blackout

• if (set point before blackout – current cold room temperature) ≤

Pdt -> brief blackout -> resume ramp from the phase where it was interrupted, with a new starting set point equal to the temperature reached by the cold room, and the phase lasts the remaining duration (as if the blackout had not occurred);

• if (set point before blackout – current cold room temperature) > Pdt

-> extended black-out, the temperature has increased too much ->

restart the ramp from the beginning (phase 1, PS1, PH1). This aims to avoid damage to the ﬂ oor due to an excessively fast pull down.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

Pdt Ramps: maximum set point variation

after blackout

20,0 10,0 30,0 °C/°F

Note: At the end of the third phase, the control set point returns to the value set for parameter St -> to avoid abrupt variations, it is

recommended to set PS3 = St.

Enable ramps

The ramps need to be enabled by setting parameter Pon=1

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

Pon Enable set point ramps

1 = ramps enabled

001 -

1. Set Pon=1;

2. The evaporator fans are activated for 3 minutes (fan relay ON and

analogue output at the maximum value corresponding to parameter F6, if enabled);

3. Initial ramp set point = Sv (virtual control probe, which coincides

with the current cold room temperature);

4. The controller adjusts the control set point based on parameters PS1,

PS2, PS3 and PH1, PH2, PH3. During each phase, the control set point is recalculated every 12 hours;

5. At the end of the phase (duration PH3), the ramps are automatically

disabled (Pon=0) and the control set point is once again the value of St.

Note: when the ramps are enabled, and throughout their duration, the SET button ﬂ ashes to indicate that the control set

point is no longer the value set for parameter St.

Note: if the second row of the display shows the set point (/t2 = 6, on models where featured), the value displayed will be the

eﬀ ective control set point.

Note: to restart the ramps, reset Pon=1

Note: the ramps are always disabled if set point variation from

digital input / time band is active

Note: the ramps can be activated even when UltraCella is OFF

Note: to skip a speciﬁ c phase of the ramp, set PHi=0 (i=1, 2 or 3)

6.4 Pump down

The pump down has the aim to completely empty the evaporator of the refrigerant at each stop of the compressor. After this phase, you can safely turn oﬀ the compressor, so that the liquid is not present the next time the compressor is started. When the set point is reached, the control closes the pump down valve to stop the ﬂ ow of refrigerant to the evaporator, and, after a certain time, the compressor. In the application diagram there are the pump down valve and the low pressure switch. When the control requires turning on the compressor, if the safety periods c1 and c2 have passed, the pump down valve is opened and after the time set in parameter c8 the compressor is activated.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

c7 Maximum pump down time (PD)

0 = Pump down disabled.

0 0 900 s

c8 Compressor start delay after opening of

pump down valve PD

5 0 60 s

H1 AUX1 output conﬁ guration

…5 = pump down valve

1 0 17 -

H5 AUX2 output conﬁ guration

…5 = pump down valve

1 0 17 -

CMP

PDV

Fig. 6.d

Key

CMP Compressor C Condenser L Liquid receiver P Low pressure switch F Dehydrator ﬁ lter E Evaporator S Liquid indicator V2 Thermostatic expansion valves PDV Pump down valve

Note: time c8 is ignored when pump down is disabled (c7=0). In

this case, the pump down valve (H1=5 or H5=5) can be used to control a solenoid valve, whose operation always matches the compressor output. c8 is also ignored when pump down is enabled (c7>0) and the compressor OFF time is 0 (c2= 0).

You can select the pump down:

• on pressure (pressure switch mandatory): once the pump down

valve closes, the compressor continues to operate until reaching the low pressure value (contact opened). At this point the compressor is turned oﬀ . If the pressure switch does not change within the time c7, alarm “Pd” triggers, pump down ended due to time-out. The Pd alarm is reset automatically if in the next pump down low pressure is reached within the time c7.

• on time (pressure switch optional): after the valve closes, the

compressor operates for the time c7. The ‘Pd’ alarm, Pump down ended by time-out, is deactivated.

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

c10 = 0: Pressure pump down

Pressure switch changes within c7

Pressure switch changes after c7

Alarm Pd

Pressure

switch

PDV

CMP, FAN

OFF

Fig. 6.e Fig. 6.f

Key

CMP, FAN Compressor, fan PDV pump down valve Pressure switch Pressure switch Sv Virtual probe c7 Pump down maximum time Pd Pump down alarm t Time St Set point

Note:

• if during the pump down there is a new demand for cooling, the pump

down procedure terminates, and the pump down valve is opened (the compressor is already on from the previous pump down phase);

• in case of “Pd” alarm the auto-start function is disabled.

6.5 Autostart in pump down

As seen in the previous paragraph, once you reach the set point, the control closes the pump down valve and then the pressure switch changes and signals low pressure. If, due to problems of sealing of the valve, the pressure switch changes again, you can reactivate the compressor with the Auto start function, signalled by the message “Ats”. This message is erased on the next correct pump down cycle

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

c9 Autostart in pump down

0 whenever pump down valve

closes

1 whenever pump down valve

closes & every request of low pressure switch without regulation request

001 -

AtS

Pressure

switch

VPD

CMP, FAN

OFF

Fig. 6.g

Note: low pressure = pressure oﬀ /open.

Key

CMP, FAN Compressor, fan t Time VPD Pump down valve AtS Autostart in pump down St Set point Pressure switch Pressure switch Sv Control probe

Notes:

• at compressor autostart, the safety times c1 and c2, not c3 are

respected;

• the message “AtS” is reset automatically on the next correct pump

down cycle.

6.6 Continuous cycle

To activate the continuous cycle by keyboard see Chapter 3 (parameter value cc> 0). During operation in a continuous cycle, the compressor continues to operate regardless the control, for the time “cc”, to lower the temperature even below the set point. The continuous cycle is stopped after the time cc or when reaching the minimum speciﬁ ed temperature, corresponding to the minimum temperature alarm threshold (AL). If, after the end of the continuous cycle, the temperature falls below the minimum temperature threshold, the low temperature alarm signal can be ignored by suitably setting the c6 parameter: the alarm bypass delay time after continuous cycle.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

cc Continuous cycle duration 0 0 15 hour c6 Low temperature alarm delay after

continuous cycle

2 0 250 hour

A5 Digital input conﬁ guration 2 (DI2)

… 14 = Continuous cycle activation

0 0 15 -

A9 Digital input conﬁ guration 3 (DI3)

… 14 = Continuous cycle activation

0 0 15 -

6.7 Door switch control

See chap. 4

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

6.8 Defrost

Introduction

These parameters (dd1…dd8) can be used to set up to 8 defrost events linked to the system clock (RTC)

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

dd1…8 Defrost 1…8: day

0 Disabled 1…7 Monday…Sunday 8 From Monday to Friday 9 From Monday to Saturday 10 Saturday and Sunday 11 Daily

0 0 11 -

hh1…8 Defrost 1…8: hour 0 0 23 hour nn1…8 Defrost 1…8: minute 0 0 59 min.

UltraCella allows you to manage the following types of defrost, depending on parameter d0:

0. electric heater defrost by temperature (placed near the evaporator);

1. hot gas defrost by temperature.

2. electric heater defrost by time;

3. hot gas defrost by time.

Note: Ed1 and Ed2 indicate that the defrost ended due to timeout.

Note: Ed1 and Ed2 alarms can be disabled by A8 parameter.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

A8 Ed1, Ed2 enable

0/1= disabled/enabled

001 -

The end of the defrost cycle can be by temperature, and in this case it is necessary to install the defrost probe Sd (to select between B2 and B3) or by time. In the ﬁ rst case the defrost ends if the probe Sd measures a value greater than the value of dt1 or dP1 time has elapsed, in the second case if the defrosting phase exceeds the maximum time dP1. At the end of the defrost the controller can enter in dripping status (present if dd> 0), in which the compressor and the fans are turned oﬀ , and subsequently in the state of post-dripping (if present Fd> 0), in which the control resumes with fans oﬀ . You can choose the display on the user terminal during defrost, using parameter d6.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

d0 Type of defrost

0 Heater by temperature 1 Hot gas by temperature 2 Heater by time 3 Hot gas by time

003 -

dt1 End defrost temperature, main

evaporator

4 -50 200 °C/°F

dt2 End defrost temperature, auxiliary

evaporator

4 -50 200 °C/°F

dP1 Maximum defrost duration 30 1 250 min dP2 Maximum defrost duration, auxiliary

evaporator

30 1 250 min

d6 Terminal display during defrost

0 = Temperature alternated with dEF 1 = Last temperature shown before defrost 2 = dEF

102 -

DEF

OFF

d0=2, 3

d0=0, 1

OFF

dt1

dt1-1

dP1

Fig. 6.h

Key

t Time dt1 End of defrost temperature dP1 Maximum defrost duration Sd Defrost Probe d0 Type of defrost DEF Defrost

1. electric heater defrost (d0 = 0, 2): operating cycle.

The operating cycle refers to default values of the parameters F2 and F3.

M B3

CMP

PDV

Fig. 6.i

RES

FAN

PDV

CMP

F3=1F0=0

REFRIG

PUMP

DOWN

DEF

(REF)

OFF

DRIP

(dd)

POST

DRIP

(Fd)

REFRIG

Fig. 6.j

Key

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

CMP Compressor Refrig Refrigeration PDV Pump down valve Pump down Pump down phase FAN Evaporator fan Def Defrost RES Resistance (defrost heater) Drip Drip E Evaporator Post drip Post drip C Condenser V2 Thermostatic expansion valve F Dehydrator ﬁ lter t Time B3 Defrost probe L Liquid receiver S Liquid indicator

Note:

• in pump-down the fan activation is determined by F0;

• in defrost the fan activation is determined by F3.

2. hot gas defrost (d0 = 1, 3): operating cycle.

The operating cycle refers to default values of the parameters F2 and F3.

CMP

V_def

Fig. 6.k

Note: the defrost output (DEF) is used for command of the hot gas valve V_def.

V_def

FAN

CMP

F3=1F0=0

REFRIG REFRIGDRIPPOST

DRIP

DEF

(hot gas)

OFF

Fig. 6.l

Key

CMP Compressor Refrig Refrigeration FAN Evaporator fan Def Defrost V_def Hot gas valve Drip Drip E Evaporator Post drip Post drip C Condenser B3 Defrost probe V2 Thermostatic expansion valve L Liquid receiver F Dehydrator ﬁ lter S Liquid indicator t Time

The defrost is activated, upon priority:

• from keyboard, using the defrost key;

• from clock, setting the event and the starting mode, with maximum 8

defrosts a day (parameters dd1...dd8);

• setting the cyclic range “dI”;

• from digital input;

• from supervisor.

The defrost is disabled:

• defrost by temperature: when the defrost probe detects a temperature

greater than the defrost end temperature dt1;

• defrost by time: in the absence of the defrost probe, the defrost ends

after the maximum time set by parameter dP1.

6.8.1 Maximum period of time between consecutive defrosts

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

dI Maximum interval between

consecutive defrosts 0 = defrost not performed

8 0 250 hour

The parameter dI is a security parameter that allows cyclical defrosts every “dI” hours even in the absence of the Real Time Clock (RTC). At the beginning of each defrost cycle, regardless of duration, a count is started. If the dl time is exceeded without performing any defrost, the defrost is automatically activated. The counter remains active even if the controller is oﬀ .

Example: in case of failure for example at RTC the scheduled defrost by td3 (= dd3, hh3, nn3) is not made, after the safety time dI starts a new defrost.

DEF

OFF

dd3

dd2

dd1

Fig. 6.m

Key

dI Maximum interval of time between consecutive defrosts dd1…dd3 Scheduled defrosts DEF Defrost t Time

Note:

• if the interval dI expires when the controller is OFF, when it is started

again a defrost is performed;

• to ensure regular defrosts, the interval between defrosts must be

greater than the maximum defrost duration, plus the dripping time and post-dripping time;

• if setting dl=0 the defrost is performed only if activated from keyboard

or by setting the scheduled defrosts (ddi).

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

6.8.2 Other defrost parameters

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

d3 Defrost activation delay 0 0 250 min d4 Defrost at start-up

0/1=No/Yes

001 -

d5 Defrost delay at start-up 0 0 250 min d8 High temperature alarm delay after

defrost (and door open)

1 0 250 hour

dpr Defrost priority over continuos cycle

0/1=No/Yes

001 -

• d3 determines the time that must elapse, when the defrost is activated,

between the stopping of the compressor (electric heater defrost) or the starting of the compressor (hot gas defrost), and the activation of the defrost relays on the main and auxiliary evaporators. In the hot gas defrost, the delay d3 is useful for ensuring a suﬃ cient amount of hot gas before activation of the hot gas valve;

• d4 determines whether to activate or not the defrost at the controller

start-up. The defrost at start-up request has priority over the activation of the compressor and the continuous cycle. Force a defrost at controller start-up may be useful in special situations.

Example: frequent power drops inside the plant. In case of lack of voltage the tool resets the inner clock that calculates the period of time between two defrosts, starting from zero. If, in an extreme case, the frequency of the power failure were greater than the defrost frequency (e.g. a power failure every 8 hours, against a defrost every 10 hours) the controller would never perform a defrost. In a situation of this type, it is preferable to activate defrost on start-up, above all if the defrost is controlled by temperature (probe on the evaporator), therefore avoiding unnecessary defrosts or at least reducing the running times. In the case of systems with a large number of units, if selecting defrosts at start-up, after a power failure all the units will start defrosting, thus causing a voltage overload. This can cause power overload. To overcome this, the parameter d5 can be used. It adds a delay before the defrost, and this delay must obviously be diﬀ erent for each unit.

• d5 represents the time that elapses between the start of the controller

and the start of the defrost at start-up;

• dd is used to force the stop of the compressor and the evaporator fan

after a defrost cycle in order to facilitate the evaporator dripping;

• d8 indicates the time of exclusion of the high temperature alarm

signalling from the end of a defrost;

• if dpr = 0, the defrost and the cycle have the same priority; if dpr = 1,

if the continuous cycle is in progress and a defrost request intervenes, the continuous cycle ends and the defrost starts.

6.9 Evaporator Fans

6.9.1 Fixed speed fans

The status of the fans depends on the compressor status. When the compressor is:

• on: the fan can also be on (F0=0) or activated based on the evaporator

temperature, virtual probe Sv, based on the formula:

if Sd ≤ (Sv - F1) -Frd --> FAN = ON if Sd ≥ (Sv - F1) --> FAN = OFF

• oﬀ : the fan is controlled by a PWM that has duty cycle with a ﬁ xed

period of 60 minutes.

duty_cycle =

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

F0 Evaporator fan management

0 = always on with compressor on 1= activation depends on Sd, Sv 3= activation based on Sd 4= always on (independent of the compressor) 5= activation with temperature / humidity control

002 -

F1 Fan activation temperature 5 -50 200 °C/°F F2 Fan activation time with CMP oﬀ 30 0 60 min F3 Evaporator fans during defrost

0/1=on/oﬀ

101 -

If the fan is oﬀ , it can be controlled by a PWM signal that has a duty cycle with a ﬁ xed period Tp of 60 min

duty_cycle =

The fan can be switched oﬀ in the following situations:

• when the compressor is oﬀ (parameter F2);

• during defrosting (parameter F3).

F0=0 The fan is always on when the compressor is on

Fig. 6.n

F0=1 The fan is activated based on the evaporator temperature, and the value of the virtual probe Sv, using the formula: if Sd ≤ (Sv - F1) -Frd --> FAN = ON if Sd ≥ (Sv - F1) --> FAN = OFF

Fig. 6.o

F0=3 The fan is activated based on the evaporator temperature only, using the formula: if Sd ≤ F1 -Frd --> FAN = ON if Sd ≥ F1 --> FAN = OFF

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

Fig. 6.p

F0=4 The fan is always on, irrespective of compressor status.

Fig. 6.q

F0=5 The fan is on if at least one of the following loads (compressor, heaters / dehumidiﬁ er, humidiﬁ er) is on

Fig. 6.r

Key

CMP Compressor PWM mod. PWM modulation F1 Fan activation threshold Frd Fan activation diﬀ erential Evap.fan Evaporator fan t Time Sv Virtual probe Sd Defrost probe

The fan can be stopped:

• when the compressor is oﬀ (parameter F2);

• during defrost (parameter F3).

6.9.2 Variable speed fans

The installation of variable speed fans may be useful to optimise energy consumption. In this case, the fans are powered by the mains, while the control signal is provided by UltraCella by analogue output Y1 0…10 Vdc.

The maximum and minimum fan speed can be set using F6 and F7 parameters (in percentage respect range 0…10V). If using the fan speed controller, F5 represents the temperature below which the fans are activated, with a ﬁ x hysteresis of 1°C.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

F5 Evaporator fans cut-oﬀ temperature

(hysteresis 1°C)

15 -50 200 °C/°F

F6 Maximum fans speed 100 F7 100 % F7 Minimum fans speed 0 0 F6 %

To enable the algorithm, it’s necessary to select variable speed fans mode (F0=2) and set analogue output 0…10 Vdc (HO1=2).

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

F0 Evaporator fan management

… 2 = variable speed fans based on Sd 6 = variable speed fans based on Sd-Sv 7 = variable speed fans based on Sv

00 2 -

HO1 Output Y1 0…10 V conﬁ guration

… 2 = variable speed fans regulated on Sd

00 3 -

Note: the behaviour of modulating fans may be aﬀ ected not only

by the “cooling” demand and temperature control request, but also by other control functions (dehumidiﬁ cation, humidiﬁ cation and heating), if present.

In order of priority, the following are possible

• If at a certain time the dehumidiﬁ cation function is activated, the fans

will run at a ﬁ xed speed - conﬁ gured by parameter F11 – for the entire duration of the dehumidiﬁ cation function.

• If at a certain time the heating function is activated, the fans will run at

maximum speed for the entire duration of the heating function.

• If at a certain time the humidiﬁ cation function is activated, the fans

will ensure a minimum speed - conﬁ gured by parameter F12 – even when the compressor is oﬀ . The fan speed may be higher based on the logic of F0

• During the “cooling” phase, fan operation normally depends on the

logic of parameter F0

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

F11 Fan speed during dehumidiﬁ cation 40 0 100 % F12 Minimum fan speed during humidiﬁ cation 10 0 100 %

F0=2 The fan modulates its speed based on the evaporator temperature only, increasing speed the further Sd is below F1:

Fig. 6.s

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

F0=6 The fan modulates its speed based on the evaporator temperature and room temperature, increasing speed the further Sd is below Sv- F1:

Fig. 6.t

F0=7 The fan modulates its speed based on room temperature, increasing speed the further Sv is above the set point St:

Fig. 6.u

Key

Sd Evaporator probe F0 Evaporator fans management F1 Fan start temperature Frd Fan activation diﬀ erential

Note:

• If two defrost probes are conﬁ gured (Sd1 and Sd2), fan speed is

calculated in relation to the probe that is measuring the higher

temperature (so as to limit the ﬂ ow of warm air): if Sd1>Sd2 –› control on Sd1; if Sd1<Sd2 –› control on Sd2. If a probe error occurs, fan speed is ﬁ xed at the value set for parameter F6.

• If F0=2 and HO1=2, fan speed is calculated according to the algorithm

in Figure 6.o. In any case, if the speed is greater than 0, the “FAN” relay

DO3 is active (closed): if speed (Y1) > 0 V –› “FAN” relay ON (DO3 closed) if speed (Y1) = 0 V –› “FAN” relay OFF (DO3 open)

• If F0=0, 1 (ﬁ xed speed fans on “FAN” relay DO3), the analogue output is

ﬁ xed at 0 (Y1=0 V)

• Within the modulation range (F1-Frd < Sd < F1), fan speed is modulated

proportionally (e.g.: Sd=F1-Frd/2 –› Y1 corresponds to the percentage

(F6+F7)/2) Due to motor mechanical inertia, some EC fans cannot start at the minimum speed set by the parameter F7. To overcome this problem, the fans can start at the maximum speed set by parameter F6 for a “peak time”, deﬁ ned by parameter F8, irrespective of the defrost temperature Sd. Vice-versa, if the fan operates too a long at low speed, ice may form on the blades; to avoid this, at intervals of F10 minutes the fan is operated at maximum speed for the time deﬁ ned by parameter F8.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

F8 Fans peak time

0 = function disabled

0 0 240 s

F10 Evaporator fans forcing time at

maximum speed 0 = function disabled

0 0 240 min

speed fans dened by Sd

F10

Fig. 6.v

Note: the periodical cycles at maximum speed (determined by F8 and F10) are not allowed when the cold room door is open.

6.9.3 Evaporator fans during defrost

The evaporator fans can be forced on both during normal control (parameter F2) and during defrost (parameter F3). During the dripping time (parameter dd > 0) and post-dripping time (parameter Fd > 0), the evaporator fans are always oﬀ . This is useful to allow the evaporator to return to operating temperature after defrosting, avoiding the ﬂ ow of warm air across the evaporator. The time dd is used to stop the compressor and the evaporator fan after defrosting, so as to assist evaporator dripping.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

F2 Fan activation time with CMP oﬀ 30 0 60 min F3 Evaporator fans during defrost

0/1=on/oﬀ

101 -

Fd Post dripping time (fans oﬀ ) 1 0 30 min F4 Humidity output during defrost

0/1 = ON/OFF

101 -

dd Dripping time after defrost (fans oﬀ ) 2 0 30 min

6.10 Condenser fans

With UltraCella, the condenser fans can be managed by one of the auxiliary relays AUX1/AUX2 (in ON/OFF mode), or by analogue output Y1 (0 to 10 V).

6.10.1 Fixed speed fans

The condenser fans are activated based on parameters FC4 and A0, after conﬁ guring the digital output AUX.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

FC4 Condenser fan deactivation

temperature

40 -50 200 °C/°F

A0 Alarm and fan diﬀ erential 2.0 0.1 20 °C/°F

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

H1 AUX1 output conﬁ guration

… 6= condenser fans

0 0 17 -

H5 AUX2 output conﬁ guration

… 6 = condenser fans

0 0 17 -

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

FAN

OFF

FC4

FC4+A0

Fig. 6.w

Key

Sc Condenser probe FAN Condenser fans FC4 Turn oﬀ temperature t Time A0 Diﬀ erential

Note: if an alarm triggers at condenser probe, the output condenser fan is always on.

6.10.2 Variable speed fans

It may be useful to manage the fans at variable speed, in order to optimise

energy consumption. In this case, the fan is powered by the mains, while

the 0 to 10 Vdc control signal is supplied by UltraCella via output Y1.

To activate this mode, the condensing temperature needs to be

determined. This can be done in two ways:

• Using an NTC / PT1000 temperature probe connected to input B3 as a

condensing temperature probe (Sc): /A3 = 2 (Sc)

• Connecting a pressure probe (4 to 20 mA / 0 to 5 Vrat) to input B5 as a

condensing pressure probe (Scp): /P5 = 0 (4…20mA) / 1 (0…5Vrat) /A5 = 5 (Scp) -> the pressure value will be converted to a temperature (Sc) based on the type of refrigerant, deﬁ ned by setting the parameter PH:

Par. Description Def Min Max U.O.M.

3 1 40 -

To activate analogue output Y1 for condenser fan control, set parameter

HO1.

Par. Description Def Min Max U.O.M.

HO1 Output Y1 conﬁ guration

3 = variable speed condenser fans

003 -

The maximum and minimum fan speed can be set using parameters FCH

and FCL (as a percentage of the range from 0 to 10 V).

Par. Description Def Min Max U.O.M.

FCH Variable speed condenser fans: max.

output value

100 FCL 100 %

FCL Variable speed condenser fans: min.

output value

0 0 FCH %

The 0 to 10 V output is activated in direct proportional mode, centred around the condenser fan control set point FCS and diﬀ erential FCd.

Par. Description Def Min Max U.O.M.

FCS Variable speed condenser fans: set point 15,0 -100.0 200,0 °C/°F FCd Variable speed condenser fans:

diﬀ erential

2,0 0,1 10,0 °C/°F

Example 1: extended output range, 0 to 10 V (FCL=0, FCH=100).

dierential dierential

FCd FCd

FCS

(setpoint)

(condenser

temperature)

FCn

min capacity = 0%

Max capacity= 100%

Analog output

FCH

max output value= 10V

FCL

min output value= 0V

Fig. 6.x

In this example, the minimum modulation capacity FCn is 0, therefore the range of modulation of the 0 to 10 V output is: FCS-FCd < Sc < FCS+FCd. .

Par. Description Def Min Max U.O.M.

FCn Variable speed condenser fans: min.

capacity percentage

0 0 FCH %

Example 2: extended output range, 0 to 10 V (FCL=0, FCH=100), minimum modulation capacity 60%.

dierential dierential

FCd FCd

FCS

(setpoint)

(condensing temperature)

FCn

min capacity= 60%

Max capacity= 100%

Analog output

FCH

output max value = 10V

FCL

input max value= 0V

Set capacity

Fig. 6.y

In this example, the range of modulation of the 0 to 10 V output is: FCS+0.2*FCd < Sc < FCS+FCd

Example 3: limited output range, 2 to 10 V (FCL=20, FCH=100), minimum modulation capacity 60%

dierential dierential

FCd FCd

FCS

(setpoint)

(condensing

temperature)

FCn

min capacity = 60%

max capacity = 100%

Analog output

FCH

output max value = 10V

FCL

output min value= 2V

Set capacity

Fig. 6.z

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

In this example, the range of modulation is still

FCS+0,2*FCd < Sc < FCS+FCd

for starting the fans, and

FCS-FCd < Sc < FCS+FCd for stopping (the fans stop when the condensing temperature is less than FCS-FCd.

Note: if a condensing temperature/pressure probe error occurs

(E2 for Sc or E4 for Scp), the analogue output will take the maximum value indicated by parameter FCH, except in the following events:

• CHt (high condenser temperature alarm, if conﬁ gured)

• EPM (motor protector alarm, 3PH module, if present and conﬁ gured)

• EPU (high/low pressure or Kriwan alarm, 3PH module, if present and

conﬁ gured)

6.10.3 Floating condensing temperature set point

The control set point for variable speed condenser fans (parameter FCS) may be either ﬁ xed or variable (ﬂ oating condensing temperature). The type of set point is selected using parameter FCt.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

FCt Variable speed condenser fans: ﬁ xed or

variable set point 0/1=ﬁ xed FCS/ﬂ oating

001-

The purpose of the ﬂ oating condensing temperature function is to lower the condensing temperature based on the outside temperature, so as to preserve correct compressor operation. The ﬂ oating condensing temperature set point algorithm requires an outside temperature probe (SA), usually located near to the condenser, so as calculate the reference control value, as shown in the following ﬁ gure:

FSL (min)

SH (max)

oating set point

FSO

(oset)

external temperature

Fig. 6.aa

To activate the ﬂ oating condensing temperature function, as well as setting FCt=1, B3 (parameter /A3) or B4 (parameter /A4) needs to be conﬁ gured as an outside temperature probe (SA).

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

/A3 Probe 3 conﬁ guration

… 4 = out. temp. probe (SA)

005-

/A4 Probe 4 conﬁ guration

… 1 = out. temp. probe (SA)

004-

Note: if the outside temperature probe SA is not conﬁ gured, or if

the probe has an error (E2 for B3, E3 for B4), the ﬂ oating condensing temperature algorithm will be disabled, and the control set point will be ﬁ xed (FCS). The algorithm allows for the ﬂ oating condensing temperature set point to vary between a minimum (parameter FSL) and a maximum (parameter FSH) and, based on the outside temperature (SA), an oﬀ set is added (parameter FSO). For details on these parameters, see the datasheet for the condenser used .

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

FSL Floating condensing temp. set point:

min value

5,0 -100,0 FSH °C/°F

FSH Floating condensing temp. set point:

max value

25,0 FSL 200,0 °C/°F

FSO Floating condensing temp. set point:

oﬀ set

5,0 -50,0 50,0 °C/°F

6.11 Duty setting

In the event the alarm “rE” (virtual control probe fault), the parameter c4 is used to ensure the operation of the compressor until the fault is resolved. The compressor cannot be activated according to the temperature (due to the faulty probe), it is activated cyclically with a time of operation (ON) equal to the value assigned to c4 and a switch-oﬀ time (OFF) ﬁ xed at 15 minutes .

CMP

OFF

c415

Fig. 6.ab

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

c4 Compressor running time in duty

setting

0 0 100 min

6.12 Bowl resistance

The resistor is used to heat the collection tank after the defrosting phase, to prevent the ice from blocking the passage of water. The resistance is activated for 3 minutes before the programmed defrost or simultaneously with a manual defrost. The resistance is always oﬀ after the defrost phase.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

H1 AUX1 output conﬁ guration

… 3 = bowl resistance activation

1 0 17 -

H5 AUX2 output conﬁ guration

… 3 =bowl resistance activation

1 0 17 -

6.13 Defrosting with 2 evaporators

You can conﬁ gure up to 2 defrost probes and up to 2 evaporator outputs. The control recognizes the conﬁ guration based on the following table (probe 1 is the control probe and cannot be conﬁ gured)

DEFROST PROBES AND EVAPORATORS OUTPUT CONFIGURATION

Case Defrost

probes

Evaporator outputs

Notes

1 B2 Evap. 1 B2 acts on the evap. 1 2 B2 Evap. 1 and 2 B2 acts on the evap. 1 3 B2 and B3 Evap. 1 B2 and B3 act on evap. 1 (start

and end of defrost based on the minimum value probe)

4 B2 and B3 Evap. 1 and 2 B2 acts on the evap. 1 and B3 act

on evap. 2

Tab. 6.b

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

CASE 4: 2 PROBES AND 2 EVAPORATORS

CMP

Fig. 6.ac

Key

E1/2 Evaporator 1/2 C Condenser V1/2 Thermostatic expansion valve 1/2 L Liquid Receiver B2/B3 defrost probe 2, 3 CMP Compressor F Filter drier S Liquid indicator

Defrosts on two evaporators can be performed either simultaneously or sequentially; the latter is used above all to limit the power consumption of the two defrost heaters working at the same time.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

d13 Defrost on two evaporators

(0=Simultaneous - 1=Separate)

001-

6.14 Second compressor with rotation

Second compressor output with double step control with rotation: the compressors will be turned on as follows:

• alternately for single step requests (as in example 3)

• the ﬁ rst to be turned on will be the ﬁ rst to be turned oﬀ for the 2 steps

requests (as in examples 1, 2 and 4)

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

H1/H5 AUX1 output conﬁ guration/AUX2

14 = second compressor with rotation management

1 0 17 -

CP2

CP1

OFF

St+rd

St+rd/2

Fig. 6.ad

OFF

rd/2

CP1

CP2

OFF

Fig. 6.ae

Key

SV Virtual probe CP1 Compressor 1 CP2 Compressor 2 rd Diﬀ erential t time St Set point

Operation examples: (NOTE: REQ1: Sv > St + rd/2; REQ2: Sv > St + rd)

Example 1

CP2

OFF

CP1

OFF

REQ2

OFF

REQ1

OFF

Fig. 6.af

Example 2

CP2

OFF

CP1

OFF

REQ2

OFF

REQ1

OFF

Fig. 6.ag

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

Example 3

CP2

OFF

CP1

OFF

REQ2

OFF

REQ1

OFF

Fig. 6.ah

Example 4

CP2

OFF

CP1

OFF

REQ2

OFF

REQ1

OFF

Fig. 6.ai

Key

REQ1 request 1 REQ2 request 2 t time CP1 compressor 1 CP2 compressor 2

6.15 Control with dead band

As well as the control output in direct mode (cooling, compressor), on UltraCella one of the two auxiliary outputs (AUX1/AUX2) can be selected in reverse mode (heating, by electric heater / other actuators). This type of control features an area in which the selected output is not active, called the dead band (parameter rn). Parameter rr represents the diﬀ erential for the output in reverse mode.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

rn Dead band 0 0 60 °C/°F rr Diﬀ erential for control with dead band 2,0 0,1 20 °C/°F

To activate heating/cooling control with dead band, set:

• rn > 0

• H1 = 16 (for AUX1) or H5 = 16 (for AUX2)

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

H1 AUX1 output conﬁ guration

… 16 = output in reverse mode for control with dead band

1 0 17 -

H5 AUX2 output conﬁ guration

… 16 = output in reverse mode for control with dead band

1 0 17 -

The ﬁ gure shown below refers to heating/cooling control with dead band for a compressor (direct) with one capacity step.

Fig. 6.aj

The following ﬁ gure, on the other hand, refers to heating/cooling control with dead band for a compressor with two capacity steps.

Fig. 6.ak

Note: the second compressor step (with or without rotation) and

control with dead band both refer to the auxiliary outputs (AUX1/ AUX2). If both are enabled, conﬁ gure, for example H1 = 14 (AUX1 second compressor step) and H5 = 16 (AUX2 output in reverse mode (heating) with dead band)

In the same way, auxiliary outputs AUX1 / AUX2 can be used for dead band control with two-step compressor and heaters, in this case conﬁ guring:

• H1=16 reverse output with dead band

• H5 = 21 reverse output 2

6.16 AUX output activation by time band

With UltraCella, auxiliary outputs AUX1/AUX2 can also be activated by time band, , using the RTC ﬁ tted on the device. When the time band is active, the AUX output (H1 for AUX1, H5 for AUX2) conﬁ gured will be active (ON, relay closed).

• Time band not active -> AUX output not active (OFF, relay open)

• Time band active -> AUX output active (ON, relay closed)

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

H1 AUX1 output conﬁ guration

… 17 = output managed by time band

1 0 17 -

H5 AUX2 output conﬁ guration

… 17 = output managed by time band

1 0 17 -

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

To activate an auxiliary output by time band, a time band needs to be enabled by setting the following parameters:

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

don

AUX activation by time band: day 0 = disable 1, 2, …7 = Sunday, Monday, … Saturday 8 = Monday to Friday 9 = Monday to Saturday 10 = Saturday & Sunday 11 = every day

0 0 11 days

hon AUX activation by time band: hours 0 0 23 hours Mon AUX activation by time band: minutes 0 0 59 min hoF AUX deactivation by time band: hours 0 0 23 hours MoF AUX deactivation by time band: minutes 0 0 59 min H8 Enable AUX activation by time band

0/1=disabled/enabled

001-

Example: to activate auxiliary output AUX1 from Monday to Friday, from 07:30 to 20:00, set:

• H1 = 17;

• don = 8;

• hon = 7;

• Mon = 30;

• hoF = 20;

• MoF = 0;

• H8 = 1 -> if H8=0 the time band will never be active

Note: the auxiliary output is activated based on the time band even when UltraCella is OFF

Note: lthe status of the AUX output (if conﬁ gured as active by time band) is also retained after a blackout

6.17 Humidity management

UltraCella can interact with CAREL humidiﬁ cation systems, managing the humidity level in combination with cooling control. The humidity must be read from UltraCella, conﬁ guring an analogue input (B4 or B5) as a 0 to 10 V or 4 to 20 mA input for humidity probes. The controller can display the humidity read by the probe and, by suitably conﬁ guring one of the auxiliary outputs, AUX1 or AUX2, activate an external CAREL humidiﬁ er to adjust the humidity level accordingly.

Carel Humidiﬁ cation systems are compatible with UltraCella

humiSonic mc multizone humiDisk

Fig. 6.al

Wiring diagram between UltraCella and humiSonic

FieldBus

24 Vac

BMS

230 V 20 A max

EN60730-1 UL 873

250 V

R5 - R6

12 (10) A 12 A res. 2HP 12FLA 72 LRA

CAREL NTC, PT1000 CAREL NTC, PT1000 CAREL NTC, PT1000

CAREL NTC, analog input 0 to 10 Vdc

B5 analog input

(4 to 20 mA)

OUT

0 to 5 Vdc

DI1

(**)

Door switch

B3 B2 B1

48 47 46 45 44 43

49 50 51 52 53 54

GND

Rx/Tx+

Rx/Tx-

GND

Rx/Tx+

Rx/Tx-

GND

Rx/Tx+

Rx/Tx-

GND

B4 B5

DI1 DI2 DI3

GND

5 VREF + Vdc

30 29 28

27 26 25

21 20 19

24 23 22

analog output (0 to 10 Vdc)

EN60730-1 UL 873

250 V

R3 - R4

10 A res. 5 (3) A 10 A res. 5FLA 18 LRA

EN60730-1 UL 873

250 V

R1 - R2

8 (4) A N.O. 8 A res. 2FLA 12 LRA

DEF

GND TxRx ON/OFF

(4)

(1) RS485

Supervisione

Supervision

FAN

LIGHT

UltraCella Control

humiSonic

Fig. 6.am

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

6.17.1 Analogue input conﬁ guration for humidity probes

Either analogue input B4 or B5 needs to be conﬁ gured a humidity probe input.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

/P4 B4 conﬁ guration

… 2 = 0 to10V

002 -

/P5 B5 conﬁ guration

… 0 = 4 to 20mA

001 -

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

/A4 B4 conﬁ guration

… 2 = humidity probe (Su)

004 -

/A5 B5 conﬁ guration

… 1 = humidity probe (Su)

005 -

Example:

Humidity probe with 0 to 10 V output -> connect the probe to input B4 and set

• /P4=2

• /A4=2

Humidity probe with 4 to 20 mA output -> connect the probe to input B5 and set

• /P5=0

• /A5=1

6.17.2 Display humidity reading on UltraCella

On models with single row display, P/Ns WB000S*, the humidity can be displayed instead of the cold room temperature, selecting:

• Humidity probe with 0 to 10 V output -> /t1=10 (B4)

• Humidity probe with 4 to 20 mA output -> /t1 = 11 (B5)

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

/t1 Variable 1 on the display

… 10 = B4 11 = B5

1 0 13 -

On models with double row display, P/Ns WB000D*, the humidity can be displayed on the second row as the second process selecting:

• Humidity probe with 0 to 10 V output -> /t2=10 (B4)

• Humidity probe with 4 to 20 mA output -> /t2 = 11 (B5)

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

/t2 Variable 2 on the display (second row)

…

10 = B4 11 = B5

6 0 23 -

6.17.3 AUX1 / AUX2 auxiliary output conﬁ guration and basic humidity control logic

To activate the humidiﬁ er connected to UltraCella, conﬁ gure one of the auxiliary outputs AUX1 or AUX2 for humidity control.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

H1 AUX1 output conﬁ guration

… 15 = humidity output

1 0 17 -

H5 AUX2 output conﬁ guration

… 15 = humidity output

1 0 17 -

Basic humidity control logic: if the humidity measured is less than the set point StH, the relay activates the externally connected humidiﬁ er (REVERSE action, standard ON/OFF with diﬀ erential).

AUX1/AUX2

Humidity output

StH

rdH

OFF

Fig. 6.an

Key

StH Humidity set point rdH Humidity diﬀ erential B5 Probe B5 conﬁ gured as 4 to 20 mA humidity probe

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

StH Humidity set point 90.0 0.0 100.0 %rH rdH Humidity diﬀ erential 5.0 0.1 20.0 %rH

Note:

1. Humidity control can be disabled during defrosting (parameter F4):

• F4=0 -> humidity control enabled based on humidity set point

StH;

• F4=1 -> humidity control not enabled: during defrost, the

external humidiﬁ er will not be activated.

2. Humidiﬁ er activation (AUX1/AUX2 relay) is always disabled in the

event of an alarm that immediately stops the compressor. Examples:

• CHT alarm;

• LP alarm (after 3 times);

• IA alarm (when A6=0).

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

F4 Humidiﬁ er relay during defrost

0 = relay enabled in defrost (based on StH) 1 = relay not enabled in defrost

101 -

6.18 Dehumidiﬁ cation

Using the same conﬁ guration of the probes as described in the previous paragraph, UltraCella can also manage dehumidiﬁ cation:

Fig. 6.ao

or humidity control with dead band:

Fig. 6.ap

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

Dehumidiﬁ cation requires simultaneous cooling (compressor) and heating (heater). The cooling eﬀ ect is to reduce the air’s relative humidity, while the heater oﬀ sets excessive cooling, keeping a virtually constant temperature in the cold room throughout the process.

For example, relay AUX2 can be used to enable the heaters, setting H5=12 to exploit the dehumidiﬁ cation logic.

Note: a stand-alone external dehumidiﬁ er can also be used; in

this case, the operating logic is completely separate from the compressor’s. The function can be conﬁ gured by setting H1 or H1 or H5 = 20.

Note: activation of one of the auxiliary relays for dehumidiﬁ cation

automatically enables dead band temperature control with rn=1

For humidity control with dead band, the humidiﬁ er also needs to be connected to relay AUX1, setting parameter H1=15

Note: activation of one of the two auxiliary relays for

dehumidiﬁ cation and the other for humidiﬁ cation, automatically enables dead band humidity control with rnH=5 (as well as dead band temperature control, as described above)

The control parameters are as follows:

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

StH Humidity set point 90.0 0.0 100.0 %rH rdH Humidity diﬀ erential 5.0 0.1 20.0 %rH rrH Dehumidiﬁ cation diﬀ erential 5.0 0.0 50.0 % rnH Humidity dead band 5.0 0.0 50.0 % TLL Minimum temperature to enable humidity

control

0.0 -60.0 60.0 °C/°F

THL Maximum temperature to enable humidity

control

0.0 -60.0 60.0 °C/°F

TdL Temp. diﬀ erential to enable humidity control 0.0 0.0 20.0 °C/°F r5 Humidity set point oﬀ set 0.0 -50.0 50.0 %

6.18.4 Simultaneous humidity and temperature

control

When both values are controlled simultaneously, generally humidity control is independent of temperature control. Humidity control can be bound within a deﬁ ned temperature range (parameters TLL and THL and the corresponding diﬀ erential TdL), so as to avoid excessive temperature deviations during humidity control.

Note: if parameters TLL and / or THL are 0, they are ignored by the

control logic

Case 1: Humidity control independent of temperature (default)

Fig. 6.aq

Temperature is controlled only after the humidity set point has been reached

Case 2: Humidity control within a range

Fig. 6.ar

Humidity is controlled in a sequence of cycles, ensuring the temperature always remains inside the range 1°C – 8°C

Case 3: Humidity control with upper temperature limit

Fig. 6.as

This conﬁ guration, if the heater is oversized, prevents the temperature from exceeding the limit of 20°C during dehumidiﬁ cation.

Case 4: Humidity control with lower temperature limit

Fig. 6.at

This conﬁ guration is used to stop humidiﬁ cation below -0.5°C (for example, fresh fruit storage with humidiﬁ cation)

Note: in the event of humidity probe errors (for example B5)

humidiﬁ cation and dehumidiﬁ cation are managed in “duty cycles”. This is only possible in humidiﬁ cation-only and dehumidiﬁ cationonly modes, are not in humidity control with dead band.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

U1 Humidity control duty cycle ON time 10 0 120 min U2 Humidity control duty cycle OFF time 60 0 120 min

Fig. 6.au

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

6.19 Generic functions

With UltraCella, a number of generic functions can be conﬁ gured, and associated with conﬁ gurable inputs and outputs that have not already been conﬁ gured for other uses. The following functions are available:

• 3 ON/OFF control functions, using outputs AUX1/AUX2 (AUX3 / AUX4

see paragraph 6.20)

• 1 modulating control function, using output Y1 (0 to 10 V)

• 2 alarms, using outputs AUX1/AUX2 (AUX3 / AUX4 see paragraph 6.20)

The generic ON/OFF or 0 to 10 V modulating control functions can be associated with an input that also has other functions (for example Sv, control probe, or Su, humidity probe), or to a free input that therefore needs to be conﬁ gured speciﬁ cally.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

/A2 Probe 2 conﬁ guration

3 = generic temperature probe 2

003 -

/A3 Probe 3 conﬁ guration

5 = generic temperature probe 3

005 -

/A4 Probe 4 conﬁ guration

3 = generic temperature probe 4 4 = generic humidity probe 4

004 -

/A5 Probe 5 conﬁ guration

2 = generic temperature probe 5 3 = generic humidity probe 5 4 = generic pressure probe 5

005 -

The generic alarm functions can be associated with an alarm already featured on UltraCella (for example CHt, high condenser temperature alarm, or LP, low pressure alarm), or to digital inputs D12/DI3, which therefore need to be conﬁ gured speciﬁ cally.

Par. Description Def Min Max U.o.M

A5 Conﬁ guration of digital input DI2

15 = alarm from generic function

0 0 15 -

A9 Conﬁ guration of digital input DI3

15 = alarm from generic function

0 0 15 -

6.19.5 ON/OFF control functions

UltraCella can manage 3 ON/OFF control functions in direct or reverse mode, based on a conﬁ gurable set point and diﬀ erential. The control variable is deﬁ ned by parameter AS1 (AS2).

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

AS1 ON/OFF control 1: control variable

conﬁ guration

0 Sm 8 generic temperature

probe 2

1 Sd1 9 generic temperature

probe 3

2 Sr 10 generic temperature

probe 4

3 Sv 11 generic temperature

probe 5

4 Sd2 12 generic humidity

probe 4

5 Sc 13 generic humidity

probe 5

6 SA 14 generic pressure

probe 5

7Su

3 0 14 -

r1S ON/OFF control 1: mode

0/1=direct/reverse

001 -

SS1 ON/OFF control 1: set point 0,0 -50,0

0,0

-20,0

200,0 100,0

999

°C/°F/

rH%/

bar/

psi

rS1 ON/OFF control 1: diﬀ erential 2,0 0,1 20,0 °C/°F/

rH%/

bar/

psi

AS2 ON/OFF control 2: control variable

conﬁ guration

0 Sm 8 generic temperature

probe 2

1 Sd1 9 generic temperature

probe 3

2 Sr 10 generic temperature

probe 4

3 Sv 11 generic temperature

probe 5

4 Sd2 12 generic humidity

probe 4

5 Sc 13 generic humidity

probe 5

6 SA 14 generic pressure

probe 5

7Su

3 0 14 -

r2S ON/OFF control 2: mode

0/1=direct/reverse

001 -

SS2 ON/OFF control 2: set point 0,0 -50,0

0,0

-20,0

200,0 100,0

999

°C/°F/

rH%/

bar/

psi

rS2 ON/OFF control 2: diﬀ erential 2,0 0,1 20,0 °C/°F/

rH%/

bar/

psi

To enable the function, set AS1/AS2 to a value greater than 0. To use outputs AUX1/AUX2 for generic ON/OFF functions, set parameters H1/ H5.

Par. Description Def Min Max U.o.M

H1 AUX1 output conﬁ guration

8 = Generic ON/OFF control function 1 9 = Generic ON/OFF control function 2

0 0 17 -

H5 AUX2 output conﬁ guration

8 = Generic ON/OFF control function 1 9 = Generic ON/OFF control function 2

0 0 17 -

Fig. 6.av

For each ON/OFF control function, two alarm absolute thresholds and an alarm notiﬁ cation delay can be set.

Par. Description Def Min Max U.o.M

AL1 ON/OFF control 1: absolute low

alarm threshold

0,0

-50.0

0.0

-20.0

200.0

100.0 999

°C/°F/ rH%/

bar/psi

AH1 ON/OFF control 1: absolute high

alarm threshold

-50.0

0.0

-20.0

200.0

100.0 999

°C/°F/ rH%/

bar/psi

Ad1 ON/OFF control 1: alarm delay 0

0 250 min

AL2 ON/OFF control 2: absolute low

alarm threshold

0,0

-50.0

0.0

-20.0

200.0

100.0 999

°C/°F/ rH%/

bar/psi

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

Par. Description Def Min Max U.o.M

AH2 ON/OFF control 2: absolute high

alarm threshold

-50.0

0.0

-20.0

200.0

100.0 999

°C/°F/

rH%/

bar/psi

Ad2 ON/OFF control 2: alarm delay 0

0 250 min

The following alarms are generated by the functions:

• GL1,GL2: alarms when exceeding low thresholds AL1, AL2

• GH1, GH2: alarms when exceeding high thresholds AH1, AH2

Example 1: ON/OFF control 1 based on pressure (input B5, 4 to 20 mA) with direct action via AUX1. Control set point 15 bars, diﬀ erential 3 bars. Set:

• /P5 = 0 -> input B5 to 4 to 20 mA

• /A5 = 4 -> generic pressure probe 5

• AS1 = 14 -> generic pressure probe 5

• r1S = 0 -> direct action

• SS1 = 15 -> control set point 15 bars

• rS1 = 3 -> diﬀ erential 3 bars

• H1 = 8 -> output AUX1 for ON/OFF control 1

Example 2: ON/OFF control 2 based on humidity (input B4, 0 to 10 V) with reverse action on AUX2. Control set point 75% rH, diﬀ erential 10% rH. Set:

• /P4 = 2 -> input B4 to 0 to 10 V

• /A4 = 4 -> generic humidity probe 4

• AS2 = 12 -> generic humidity probe 4

• r2S = 1 -> reverse action

• SS2 = 75 -> control set point 75% rH

• rS2 = 10 -> diﬀ erential 10% rH

• H5 = 9 -> output AUX2 for ON/OFF control 2

Note: the third generic ON/OFF control function can be

conﬁ gured by setting parameter AS3 in the same way as for AS1/ AS2 (see the parameter table). If all three generic functions available are used, outputs AUX3 (parameter H13) and AUX4 (parameter H14) can also be used, suitably re-conﬁ guring the relays on UltraCella (see paragraph

6.20 for further information)

6.19.6 Modulating control

UltraCella can manage a modulating control function using a 0 to 10 V analogue output with direct or reverse action and settable control set point and diﬀ erential. The control variable is deﬁ ned by parameter AM1, the control range by parameter rM1.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

AM1 Modulating control: control variable

conﬁ guration

0 Sm 8 generic temperature

probe 2

1 Sd1 9 generic temperature

probe 3

2 Sr 10 generic temperature

probe 4

3 Sv 11 generic temperature

probe 5

4 Sd2 12 generic humidity

probe 4

5 Sc 13 generic humidity

probe 5

6 SA 14 generic pressure

probe 5

7Su

3 0 14 -

r1M Modulating control: mode

0/1=direct/reverse

001 -

SM1 Modulating control: set point 0,0 -50,0

0,0

-20,0

200,0 100,0

999

°C/°F/

rH%/

bar/

psi

rc1 Modulating control: diﬀ erential 2,0 0,1 20,0 °C/°F/

rH%/

bar/

psi

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

rM1 Modulating control: modulation range,

between min SL1 and max SH1

2,0 0,1 40,0 °C/°F/

rH%/

bar/

psi

The maximum and minimum values can be set using parameters SH1 and SL1 (cut-oﬀ ), as a percentage of the range from 0 to 10 V..

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

SL1 Modulating control: min. modulating

output value (cut-oﬀ )

0,0 0,0 SH1 %

SH1 Modulating control: max. modulating

output value

100,0 SL1 100,0 %

To enable the function, set AM1 to a value greater than 0. To use the 0 to 10 V analogue output Y1 for the generic modulating function, set parameter HO1.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

HO1 Conﬁ guration of output Y1

1 = modulating output 1 (generic function)

003 -

rc1 rM1

SH1= MAX

SL1= MIN (cut-o )

regulation variable

direct modulation (r1M= 0)

Fig. 6.aw

SM1

rc1

rM1

SH1= MAX

SL1= MIN (cut-o )

regulation variable

reverse modulation (r1M= 1)

Fig. 6.ax

Also for modulating control, two alarm absolute thresholds and an alarm notiﬁ cation delay can be set.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

AL3 Modulating control: absolute low

alarm threshold

0,0

-50.0

0.0

-20.0

200.0

100.0 999

°C/°F/

rH%/

bar/psi

AH3 Modulating control: absolute

high alarm threshold

0,0

-50.0

0.0

-20.0

200.0

100.0 999

°C/°F/

rH%/

bar/psi

Ad3 Modulating control: alarm delay 0 0 250 min

The following alarms are generated by the functions:

• GL3: alarm when exceeding low threshold AL3

• GH3: alarm when exceeding high threshold AH3

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

Example: 0 to 10 V modulating control based on pressure (input B5, 4 to 20 mA) with direct action, control set point 10 bars, diﬀ erential 1 bar, modulation range 8 bars, minimum output 2 V, maximum output 8 V. Set:

• /P5 = 0 -> input B5 to 4 to 20 mA

• /A5 = 4 -> generic pressure probe 5

• AM1 = 14 -> generic pressure probe 5

• r1M = 0 -> direct action

• SM1 = 10 -> control set point 10 bars

• rc1 = 1 -> diﬀ erential 1 bar

• rM1 = 8 -> modulation range 8 bars

• SL1 = 20,0 -> minimum output 2 V

• SH1 = 80,0 -> maximum output 8 V

• HO1 = 1 -> 0 to 10 V output Y1 for generic modulating function

6.19.7 Generic alarms

UltraCella can manage up to two generic alarms, associated with alarms that are already featured (for example CHt, high condenser temperature alarm, or LP, low pressure alarm), or to digital inputs D12/DI3, which therefore need to be speciﬁ cally conﬁ gured. The source of the alarm is deﬁ ned by parameter AA1 (AA2), the notiﬁ cation delay by parameter Ad4 (Ad5).

If the generic alarm is associated with digital input DI2 (for AA1) or DI3 (for AA2), the operating logic can be selected (normally open/normally closed):

• r1A (r2A) = 0 -> N.O. logic -> alarm if DI2 (DI3) is closed (active)

• r1A (r2A) = 1 -> N.C.logic -> alarm if DI2 (DI3) is open (not active)

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

AA1

Alarm 1: select source

0 DI2 (with A5=15) 1 Virtual probe (Sv) fault (rE) 2 Probe S1 (Sm) fault (E0) 3 Probe S2 fault (E1) 4 Probe S3 fault (E2) 5 Probe S4 fault (E3) 6 Probe S5 fault (E4) 7 Low pressure alarm (LP) 8 Immediate external alarm (IA)

9 Low temperature alarm (LO) 10 High temperature alarm (HI) 11 High condenser temperature

alarm (CHt)

0 0 11 -

r1A Alarm 1: logic

0/1=normally open/normally closed

00 1-

Ad4 Alarm 1: delay 0 0 250 min AA2

Alarm 2: select source

0 DI3 (with A9=15)

1 Virtual probe (Sv) fault (rE)

2 Probe S1 (Sm) fault (E0)

3 Probe S2 fault (E1)

4 Probe S3 fault (E2)

5 Probe S4 fault (E3)

6 Probe S5 fault (E4)

7 Low pressure alarm (LP)

8 Immediate external alarm (IA)

9 Low temperature alarm (LO) 10 High temperature alarm (HI) 11 High condenser temperature

alarm (CHt)

0 0 11 -

r2A Alarm 2: logic

0/1=normally open/normally closed

00 1-

Ad5 Alarm 2: delay 0 0 250 min

The following alarms are generated by the functions:

• GA1: alarm relating to function AA1

• GA2: alarm relating to function AA2

To associate the generic alarm to a digital input, DI2 or DI3, set parameter A5 or A9.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

A5 Digital input 2 conﬁ guration (DI2)

15 = alarm from generic function

0 0 15 -

A9 Digital input 3 conﬁ guration (DI3)

15 = alarm from generic function

0 0 15 -

To use outputs AUX1/AUX2 for the generic alarms, set parameters H1/H5.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

H1 AUX1 output conﬁ guration

10 = generic alarm 1 (GA1) 11 = generic alarm 2 (GA2)

0 0 17 -

H5 AUX2 output conﬁ guration

10 = generic alarm 1 (GA1) 11 = generic alarm 2 (GA2)

0 0 17 -

Example: AUX1 active for alarm from digital input DI3 with N.C. logic, delay 15 minutes. Set:

• AA2 = 0 -> Alarm 2 associated with digital input DI3

• r2A = 1 -> N.C. logic

• Ad5 = 15 -> delay 15 minutes

• A9 = 15 -> DI3 for alarm from generic function

• H1 = 11 -> AUX1 for generic alarm 2

6.20 Output conﬁ guration

On UltraCella, the functions associated with the 6 physical outputs (relays) can be conﬁ gured so as to adapt to the needs of most installations.

For example, if the cold room light does not need to be managed from the panel, as it is already managed centrally or by an external control, the corresponding output (relay) R3 can be used for a diﬀ erent function, for example to control heaters in the collection pan.

The conﬁ guration is performed in two steps:

1. Conﬁ gure the generic function corresponding to the output (relay)

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

H15

Output R1 conﬁ guration

0 compressor 1 defrost 2 fan 3 light 4 AUX1 5 AUX2 6 AUX3 7 AUX4

507-

H16

Output R2 conﬁ guration - see H15

407-

H17

Output R3 conﬁ guration - see H15

307-

H18

Output R4 conﬁ guration - see H15

207-

H19

Output R5 conﬁ guration - see H15

107-

H20

Output R6 conﬁ guration - see H15

007-

2. Conﬁ gure the speciﬁ c function corresponding to the output (AUX1-

AUX4) selected in the previous step

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

H15

AUX1 output conﬁ guration

9 Control output 2 ON/OFF 10 Alarm output 1 11 Alarm output 2 12 Do not select 13 Second compressor step 14 Second compressor step with rotation

1 0 21 -

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

AUX1 output conﬁ guration

15 Humidity output 16 Reverse mode output 17 Output managed by time band 18 Control output 3 ON/OFF 19 Reverse output - dehumidiﬁ cation 20 External dehumidiﬁ er 21 Reverse mode output 2

1 0 21 -

AUX2 output conﬁ guration - see H1

1 0 21 -

H13

AUX3 output conﬁ guration - see H1

2 0 21 -

H14

AUX4 output conﬁ guration - see H1

2 0 21 -

Note: the UltraCella relays have diﬀ erent ratings (max current

permitted) and some of these are already powered at 230 V: always check the relay’s rating and power supply in relation to the load being controlled.

Note: if the AUX3 and AUX4 functions are used, their status

(function active or inactive) is indicated by the LEDs on the UP and DOWN arrows. The UP and DOWN arrow buttons do not activate the AUX3 and AUX4 functions (unlike in the case of AUX1 and AUX2)

AUX 3

AUX 4

Fig. 6.ay

6.20.8 Smooth Lines

The Smooth Lines function requires UltraCella to be connected to an EVD module to control an electronic valve. The purpose is to constantly modulate refrigerant ﬂ ow to the evaporator so as to keep the temperature inside the cold room as constant as possible and avoid frequent compressor on/oﬀ cycles. The result is better product preservation in the cold room and considerable energy savings compared to traditional ON/ OFF control.

The following parameters are used:

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

To enable the Smooth lines function, access the EVD EVO menu, enable the EVD module and set PSM =1

The function works as follows: When the temperature reaches the set point + half of the diﬀ erential ('ST + rd / 2'), control does not stop, rather a PID algorithm increases the superheat set point in order to modulate the expansion valve opening. This special algorithm works until the temperature exceeds the value 'ST

- PLt', when "Smooth lines active" is set to 1.

When the Smooth lines function is active, the algorithm tells the supervisor, if connected, whether UltraCella is operating within a certain margin, in other words, whether the suction pressure set point on the corresponding line can be increased without having a negative impact on control (if the average set point is greater than P3 + THS, calculated inside the time frame FSt)

If the average set point is greater than P3 + TSH, the Smooth Lines status is set to 0, allowing the suction pressure to be increased.

Fig. 6.az

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

7. PARAMETERS TABLE

Par. Description Def Min Max UOM Type CAREL SVP Modbus

SVP

R/W page

Pro

/21 Probe measurement stability probe 1 4 0 9 - I 12 51 R/W 37 /22 Probe measurement stability probe 2 4 0 9 - I 13 52 R/W 37 /23 Probe measurement stability probe 3 4 0 9 - I 14 53 R/W 37 /24 Probe measurement stability probe 4 4 0 9 - I 15 54 R/W 37 /25 Probe measurement stability probe 5 4 0 9 - I 16 55 R/W 37 /4 Virtual probe composition

0 = probe B1 100= probe B2

0 0 100 - I 17 56 R/W 44

/5t Temperature unit of measure

0/1 = °C / °F

0 0 1 - I 18 57 R/W 38

/5P Pressure unit of measure

0/1 = bar/psi

0 0 1 - I 19 58 R/W 38

/6 Display decimal point

0/1 = yes/no

0 0 1 - D 19 8 R/W 38

/t1 Display variable 1

0 None 7 B1 1 Virtual probe (Sv) 8 B2 2 Outlet probe (Sm) 9 B3 3 Intake probe (Sr) 10 B4 4 Defrost probe 1 (Sd1) 11 B5 5 Defrost probe 2 (Sd2) 12 Condenser probe (Sc) 6 Set point 13 Variable speed condenser fans

set point

1 0 13 - I 67 106 R/W 38

/t2 Display variable 2 (*)

0 None 13 Superheat (EVO) 1 Virtual probe (Sv) 14 Valve opening % (EVO) 2 Outlet probe (Sm) 15 Valve opening in steps (EVO) 3 Intake probe (Sr) 16 Condenser probe (Sc) 4 Defrost probe 1 (Sd1) 17 Probe U1 (3ph mod.) 5 Defrost probe 2 (Sd2) 18 Probe U2 (3ph mod.) 6 Set point 19 Probe U3 (3ph mod.) 7 B1 20 Variable condenser speed set

point (Y1)

8B2 9 B3 21 Superheat (EVDice)) 10 B4 22 Valve opening % (EVDice) 11 B5 23 Valve opening in steps (EVDice) 12 rd

Humidity set point (*) can be viewed only on UltraCella Sevice Terminal or on the controller with double row display

6 0 24 - I 68 107 R/W 38

/P Type B1 to B3

0 NTC Standard range -50T90°C 1 NTC extended range 0T150°C 2 PT1000

0 0 2 - I 20 59 R/W 34

/A2 B2 conﬁ guration

0 Absent 1 Defrost probe 1 (Sd1) 2 Intake probe (Sr) 3 Generic function on probe 2

1 0 3 - I 21 60 R/W 34

/A3 B3 conﬁ guration

0 Absent 1 Defrost probe 2 (Sd2) 2 Condenser probe (Sc) 3 Defrost probe 1 (Sd1) 4 Ambient temperature probe (SA) 5 Generic function on probe 3

0 0 5 - I 22 61 R/W 34

/P4 B4 type

0 NTC Standard range -50T90°C 1 NTC Extended range 0T150°C 2 0 to 10 V

0 0 2 - I 23 62 R/W 34

/A4 B4 conﬁ guration

0 Absent 1 Ambient temperature probe (SA) 2 Humidity probe 3 Probe 4 generic temperature 4 Probe 4 generic humidity

0 0 4 - I 24 63 R/W 34

/P5 B5 type

0 4 … 20 mA 1 0 … 5 Vrat 2 0.5 … 4.5 Vrat

0 0 2 - I 25 64 R/W 34

/A5 B5 conﬁ guration

0 Absent 1 Humidity probe 2 Probe 5 generic temperature 3 Probe 5 generic humidity 4 Probe 5 generic pressure 5 Scp (Condensing pressure probe)

0 0 5 - I 26 65 R/W 34

Type of variable: A = analogue, I = integer, D = digital

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

Par. Description Def Min Max UOM Type CAREL SVP Modbus

SVP

R/W page

/4L Probe 4 minimum value 0 -50.0 /4H - A 98 208 R/W 34 /4H Probe 4 maximum value 100 /4L 200 - A 99 209 R/W 34 /5L Probe 5 minimum value 0 -50.0 /5H - A 100 210 R/W 34 /5H Probe 5 maximum value 100 /5L 999 - A 101 211 R/W 34 /C1 Oﬀ set B1 0 -20.0 20.0 °C/°F A 7 0 R/W 34 /C2 Oﬀ set B2 0 -20.0 20.0 °C/°F A 8 1 R/W 34 /C3 Oﬀ set B3 0 -20.0 20.0 °C/°F A 9 2 R/W 34 /C4 Oﬀ set B4 0 -20.0 20.0 °C/°F/

%rH

A 10 3 R/W 34

/C5 Oﬀ set B5 0 -20.0 20.0 °C/°F/

%rH/

bar/psi

A 11 4 R/W 34

CtL

St Set point 0 r1 r2 °C/°F A 12 5 R/W 44 rd Diﬀ erential 2.0 0.1 20 °C/°F A 13 6 R/W 44 r1 Minimum set point -50.0 -50.0 r2 °C/°F A 14 7 R/W 44 r2 Maximum set point 60.0 r1 200 °C/°F A 15 8 R/W 44 r3 Operating mode

0 direct with defrost 1 direct without defrost

0 0 1 - D 11 0 R/W 44

rn Dead band

0060

°C/°F A 80 190 R/W 55

rr Diﬀ erential for control with dead band

2,0 0,1 20

°C/°F A 81 191 R/W 55

r4 Oﬀ set set point

36060

°C/°F A 82 192 R/W 45 StH Humidity set point 90.0 0.0 100.0 %rH A 28 19 R/W 58 rdH Humidity diﬀ erential 5.0 0.1 20.0 %rH A 29 20 R/W 58 PS1 Ramps: ﬁ nal set point, phase 1 0 -50.0 200.0 °C/°F A 77 187 R/W 45 PS2 Ramps: ﬁ nal set point, phase 2 0 -50.0 200.0 °C/°F A 78 188 R/W 45 PS3 Ramps: ﬁ nal set point, phase 3 -30.0 -50.0 -200.0 - A 79 189 R/W 45 PH1 Ramps: duration of phase 1 6 0 10 days A 102 212 R/W 45

PH2 Ramps: duration of phase 2 2 0 10 days A 103 213 R/W 45 PH3 Ramps: duration of phase 3 10 0 10 days A 104 214 R/W 45 Pdt Ramps: maximum set point variation after blackout 20.0 10.0 30.0 °C/°F A 106 216 R/W 46 Pon Enable set point ramps

0/1 = ramps disabled/enabled

0 0 1 - D 159 48 R/W 46

CMP

c0 Compressors/fan start delay at power on 0 0 15 min I 31 70 R/W 43 c1 Minimum time between compressor starts 6 0 30 min I 32 71 R/W 37 c2 Minimum compressor oﬀ time 3 0 15 min I 33 72 R/W 37 c3 Minimum compressor on time 3 0 15 min I 34 73 R/W 37 c4 Compressor running time in duty setting 0 0 100 min I 35 74 R/W 53 cc Continuous cycle duration 0 0 15 hours I 36 75 R/W 47 c6 Low temperature alarm delay after continuous cycle 2 0 250 hours I 37 76 R/W 47 c7 Maximum pump down (PD) time

0 = Pump down disabled

0 0 900 s I 38 77 R/W 46

c8 Compressor start delay after opening of pump down valve 5 0 60 s I 39 78 R/W 46 c9 Autostart in pump down

0/1 = whenever pump down valve closes/ whenever pump down valve closes & every request of low pressure switch without regulation request

0 0 1 - D 13 2 R/W 47

c10 Pump down by time/pressure

0/1 = pressure/ time

0 0 1 - D 12 1 R/W 47

c11 Second compressor start delay 4 0 250 s I 40 79 R/W 43 FC4 Condenser fan deactivation temperature 40.0 -50.0 200.0 °C/°F A 16 9 R/W 52 FCH

Variable speed condenser fans: max. output value 100 FCL 100 %

A 131 241 R/W 52

FCL

Variable speed condenser fans: min. output value 0 0 FCH %

A 132 242 R/W 52

FCn

Variable speed condenser fans: min. capacity % 0 0 FCH %

A 133 243 R/W 52

FCS

Variable speed condenser fans: set point 15.0 -100.0 200.0 °C/°F

A 134 244 R/W 52

FCd

Variable speed condenser fans: diﬀ erential 2.0 0.1 10.0 °C/°F

A 135 245 R/W 52

FCt

Variable speed condenser fans: ﬁ xed or ﬂ oating set point 0/1= FCS ﬁ xed/ﬂ oating

00 1 -

D 167 56 R/W 53

FSH

Floating condensing temp. set point: max value 25.0 FSL 200.0 °C/°F

A 136 246 R/W 53

FSL

Floating condensing temp. set point: min value 5.0 -100.0 FSH °C/°F

A 137 247 R/W 53

FSO

Floating condensing temp. set point: oﬀ set 5.0 -50.0 50.0 °C/°F

A 138 248 R/W 53

dEF

d0 Type of defrost

0 Heater by temperature 1 Hot gas by temperature 2 Heater by time 3 Hot gas by time

0 0 3 - I 41 80 R/W 36

dI Max interval between consecutive defrosts

0 = defrost not performed

8 0 250 hours I 42 81 R/W 49

dt1 End defrost temperature, main evaporator 4.0 -50.0 200.0 °C/°F A 17 10 R/W 36

48 dt2 End defrost temperature, auxiliary evaporator 4.0 -50.0 200.0 °C/°F A 18 11 R/W 48 dP1 Maximum defrost duration 30 1 250 min I 43 82 R/W 36

48 dP2 Maximum defrost duration, auxiliary evaporator 30 1 250 min I 44 83 R/W 45 dd Dripping time after defrost 2 0 30 min I 45 84 R/W 36 d3 Defrost activation delay 0 0 250 min I 46 85 R/W 50

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

Par. Description Def Min Max UOM Type CAREL SVP Modbus

SVP

R/W page

dpr Defrost priority over continuous cycle

0/1 = no/yes

0 0 1 - D 15 4 R/W 50

d4 Defrost at start-up

0/1=no/yes

0 0 1 - D 14 3 R/W 50

d5 Defrost delay at start-up 0 0 250 min I 47 86 R/W 50 d6 Terminal display during defrost

0 Temperature alternated with dEF 1 Last temperature shown before defrost 2 dEF

1 0 2 - I 49 88 R/W 48

d8 High temperature alarm delay after defrost (and door open) 1 0 250 hours I 48 87 R/W 50

d13 Defrost on two evaporators (0=Simultaneous - 1=Separate) 0 0 1 / D 193 63 R/W 36

ALM

A0 Alarm and fan diﬀ erential 2.0 0.1 20.0 °C/°F A 19 12 R/W 52

A1 Alarm thresholds (AL, AH) relative to set point or absolute

0/1=relative/absolute

0 0 1 - D 16 5 R/W 73

AL Low temperature alarm threshold

If A1=0, AL=0: alarm disabled If A1=1, AL=-50: alarm disabled

0.0 -50.0 200.0 °C/°F A 20 13 R/W 73

AH High temperature alarm threshold

If A1=0, AH=0: alarm disabled If A1=1, AH=200: alarm disabled

0.0 -50.0 200.0 °C/°F A 21 14 R/W 73

Ad High/low temperature alarm delay 120 0 250 min I 50 89 R/W 73 A5 Digital input 2 (DI2) conﬁ guration

0 Inactive 9 Do not select 1 Immediate external alarm 10 Do not select 2 Do not select 11 Do not select 3 Enable defrost 12 Activate AUX 4 Start defrost 13 Do not select 5 Door switch (enable A3) 14 Activate continuous cycle 6 Remote ON/OFF 15 Alarm from generic function 7 Change set point 16 Start/stop defrost 8 Low pressure switch 17 Serious alarm

0 0 17 - I 51 90 R/W

35 45 47 58 60

A6 Stop compressor on external alarm 0 0 100 min I 53 92 R/W 73 A7 Low pressure (LP) alarm delay 1 0 250 min I 54 93 R/W 36 A8 Enable Ed1 and Ed2 alarms

0/1= disabled/enabled alarms

0 0 1 - D 168 57 R/W 48

A9 Digital input 3 (DI3) conﬁ guration

0 0 17 - I 52 91 R/W 35

45 47 58 60

A10 Low pressure alarm delay (LP), compressor running 3 0 60 min I 55 94 R/W Ac High temperature condenser alarm threshold 70.0 -50.0 200.0 °C/°F A 22 15 R/W 74 Acd High temperature condenser alarm delay 0 0 250 min I 56 95 R/W 74 ULL

Absolute low humidity alarm threshold 0= alarm disabled

0 0 100.0 %rH

A 84 194 R/W 73

UHL

Absolute high humidity alarm threshold 100= alarm disabled

100.0 0 100.0 %rH

A 83 193 R/W 73

AdH

Humidity alarms AUH, AUL delay 120 0 250 min

A 117 227 R/W 73

A11

Digital input 1 conﬁ guration (DI1)

5017 /

A 176 279 R/W 34

Fan

F0 Evaporator fan management

0 (ON-OFF) always on

with compressor on

4 (ON-OFF) always on

1 (ON-OFF) activation based on

Sd, Sv

5 (ON-OFF) activation with temp. /

humidity control

2 (MODULATING)

variabile speed based on Sd

6 (MODULATING) variabile speed

fas based on Sd-Sv

3 (ON-OFF) activation based on Sd7 (MODULATING) variabile speed

fans based on Sv

0 0 2 - I 174 265 R/W 50

F1 Fan activation temperature 5.0 -50.0 200.0 °C/°F A 23 16 R/W 50 Frd Fan activation diﬀ erential 2.0 0.1 20.0 °C/°F A 24 17 R/W 50

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

Par. Description Def Min Max UOM Type CAREL SVP Modbus

SVP

R/W page

F2 Fan activation time with compressor oﬀ 30 0 60 min I 57 96 R/W 50

51 F3 Evaporator fan during defrost

0/1= ON/OFF

1 0 1 - D 17 6 R/W 36

Fd Post dripping time 1 0 30 min I 60 99 R/W 36 F4 Humidity output during defrost

0/1 = ON/OFF

1 0 1 - D 71 28 R/W 51

58 F5 Evaporator fans cut-oﬀ temperature (hysteresis 1°C) 15 -50 200 °C/°F A 25 18 R/W 51 F6 Maximum fan speed 100 F7 100 % I 58 97 R/W 51 F7 Minimum fan speed 0 0 F6 % I 59 98 R/W 51 F8 Fans peak time

0 = disabled function

0 0 240 s I 176 175 R/W 51

F10 Evaporator fans forcing time at maximum speed

0 = disabled function

0 0 240 min I 177 176 R/W 51

CnF

H0 Serial address 193 0 247 - I 69 108 R 38 In Type of unit 0 0 0 - - - - R H1 AUX1 output conﬁ guration

0 Normally energised alarm 11 Alarm output 2 1 Normally de-energised alarm 12 Do not select 2 Activate from AUX button or DI 13 Second compressor step 3 Activate collection pan heater 14 Second compressor step with

rotation 4 Auxiliary evaporator defrost 15 Humidity output 5 Pump down valve 16 Reverse mode output 6 Condenser fan 17 Output managed by time band 7 Delayed compressor 18 Control output 3 ON/OFF 8 Control output 1 ON/OFF 19 Reverse output - dehumidiﬁ cation 9 Control output 2 ON/OFF 20 External dehumidiﬁ er 10 Alarm output 1 21 Reverse mode output 2

1 0 21 - I 61 100 R/W 38

43 46 52 53 54 55 56 58 59 61

H4 Buzzer

0/1 = enabled/ disabled

0 0 1 - D 21 10 R/W 38

H5 AUX2 output conﬁ guration

1 0 21 - I 62 101 R/W 38

43 46 52 53 54 55 56 58 59 61

H6 Terminal keys block conﬁ guration

0 all keys enabled 1 Set point modiﬁ cation 2 Defrost 48 AUX1 output 16 PRG+SET (menu) 32 AUX2 output 64 ON/OFF management 128 Light management 255 all keys disabled

0 0 255 - I 70 109 R/W 38

HO1 Output Y1 conﬁ guration

0 Not active 1 Modulating output 1 (generic function) 2 Variable speed evaporator fans set on Sd probe 3 Variable speed condenser fans

0 0 3 - I 63 102 R/W 43

51 52 60

H7 BMS protocol selection

0= Carel 1= Modbus

0 0 1 - I 188 180 R/W 18

H10 BMS baud rate bit/s

0 1200 5 38400 1 2400 6 57600 2 4800 7 76800 3 9600 8 115200 4 19200 9 375000

4 0 9 - A 165 266 R/W 18

H11 BMS stop bits

1 1 bit di stop 2 2 di bit di stop

2 1 2 - A 166 267 R/W 18

H12 BMS parity

1 odd 2even

0 0 2 - A 167 268 R/W 18

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

Par. Description Def Min Max UOM Type CAREL SVP Modbus

SVP

R/W page

tr1 First temperature to be recorded

0 No log 5 Sd2 1Sv 6 Sc 2Sm 7 SA 3Sr 8 Su 4Sd1

0 0 8 - I 189 181 R/W 29

tr2 Second temperature to be recorded

0 No log 5 Sd2 1Sv 6 Sc 2Sm 7 SA 3Sr 8 Su 4Sd1

0 0 8 - I 190 182 R/W 29

trc Sample time temperature recording 5 2 60 min I 191 183 R/W 29

H13 AUX3 output conﬁ guration

0 Normally energised alarm 11 Alarm output 2 1 Normally de-energised alarm 12 Do not select 2 Cannot be selected 13 Second compressor step 3 Activate collection pan heater 14 Second compressor step with

2 0 21 / A 168 271 R/W 62-64

H14 AUX4 output conﬁ guration

2 0 21 / A 169 272 R/W 62-64

HcP

HCE Enable HACCP

0/1 = No/Yes

0 0 1 - D 22 11 R/W 74

Htd HACCP alarm delay 0 0 250 min I 71 110 R/W 74

rtC

tcE Enable data modiﬁ cation 0 0 1 - D 24 13 R/W 23 tcT Date/ time change

Action on variation 0Æ1 o 1Æ0

0 0 1 - D 25 14 R/W 23

y__ Date/ time: year 0 0 37 - I 98 111 R/W 23 M__ Date/ time: month 1 1 12 - I 99 112 R/W 23 d__ Date/ time : day of month 1 1 31 - I 100 113 R/W 23 h__ Date/ time: hour 0 0 23 - I 101 114 R/W 23 n__ Date/ time: minute 0 0 59 - I 102 115 R/W 23 tcL Hours/minutes visualization on the second row for models with two rows

display 0/1=no/yes

0 0 1 - D 72 29 R/W 66

ddi Defrost i (i=1…8): day 0 0 11 days I 103…110 116...123 R/W 48 hhi Defrost i (i=1…8): hour 0 0 23 hours I 111…118 124...131 R/W 48 nni Defrost i (i=1…8): minute 0 0 59 min I 119…126 132...139 R/W 48 don

AUX activation by time band: day

0 0 11 days

A 105 215 R/W 56

hon AUX activation by time band: hours 0 0 23 hours

A 107 217 R/W 56

Mon AUX activation by time band: minutes 0 0 59 min

A 109 219 R/W 56

hoF AUX deactivation by time band: hours 0 0 23 hours

A 108 218 R/W 56

MoF AUX deactivation by time band: minutes 0 0 59 min

A 110 220 R/W 56

H8 Enable AUX activation by time band

0/1=disabled/enabled

00 1 -

D 160 49 R/W 56

dSn Set point variation by time band: day 0 0 11 days

A 111 221 R/W 45

hSn Start set point variation by time band: hours 0 0 23 hours

A 113 223 R/W 45

MSn Start set point variation by time band: minutes 0 0 59 min

A 115 225 R/W 45

hSF End set point variation by time band: hours 0 0 23 hours

A 114 224 R/W 45

MSF End set point variation by time band: minutes 0 0 59 min

A 116 226 R/W 45

H9 Enable set point variation by time band

0/1=disabled/enabled

00 1 -

D 161 50 R/W 45

doL

c12 Compressor safety time for door switch

0 = disable door management

5 0 5 min I 64 103 R/W 36

d8d Compressor restart time for door switch 30 c12 240 min I 65 104 R/W 36 A3 Disable door microswitch

0 = door microswitch enabled 1 = door microswitch disabled

1 0 1 - D 138 45 R/W 35

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

Par. Description Def Min Max UOM Type CAREL SVP Modbus

SVP

R/W page

tLi Light on with door open 120 0 240 min I 66 105 R/W 37 A4 Light management

0 = door switch + light key - 1 = light key

0 0 1 - D 18 7 R/W 37

rcP (see chapter 3 the procedure for setting parameters to default values)

GEF

AS1 ON/OFF control 1: control variable conﬁ guration

0 Sm 8 probe 2 generic temperature 1 Sd1 9 probe 3 generic temperature 2 Sr 10 probe 4 generic temperature 3 Sv 11 probe 5 generic temperature 4 Sd2 12 probe 4 generic humidity 5 Sc 13 probe 5 generic humidity 6 SA 14 probe 5 generic pressure 7Su

3 0 14 -

A 119 229 R/W 58

r1S ON/OFF control 1: mode

0/1=direct/reverse

00 1 -

D 162 51 R/W 58

SS1 ON/OFF control 1: set point 0.0 -50.0

0.0

-200.0

200.0

100.0 999

°C/°F/

rH%/

bar/psi

A 85 195 R/W 58

rS1 ON/OFF control 1: diﬀ erential 2.0 0.1 20.0 °C/°F/

rH%/

bar/psi

A 87 197 R/W 58

AL1 ON/OFF control 1: absolute low alarm threshold 0.0 -50.0

0.0

-200.0

200.0

100.0 999

°C/°F/

rH%/

bar/psi

A 89 199 R/W 59

AH1 ON/OFF control 1: absolute high alarm threshold 0.0 -50.0

0.0

-200.0

200.0

100.0 999

°C/°F/

rH%/

bar/psi

A 91 201 R/W 59

Ad1 ON/OFF control 1: alarm delay 0 0 250 min

A 121 231 R/W 59

AS2 ON/OFF control 2: control variable conﬁ guration

3 0 14 -

A 120 230 R/W 58

r2S ON/OFF control 2: mode

0/1=direct/reverse

00 1 -

D 163 52 R/W 58

SS2 ON/OFF control 2: set point 0.0 -50.0

0.0

-200.0

200.0

100.0 999

°C/°F/

rH%/

bar/psi

A 86 196 R/W 58

rS2 ON/OFF control 2: diﬀ erential 2.0 0.1 20.0 °C/°F/

rH%/

bar/psi

A 88 198 R/W 58

AL2 ON/OFF control 2: absolute low alarm threshold 0.0 -50.0

0.0

-200.0

200.0

100.0 999

°C/°F/

rH%/

bar/psi

A 90 200 R/W 59

AH2 ON/OFF control 2: absolute high alarm threshold 0.0 -50.0

0.0

-200.0

200.0

100.0 999

°C/°F/

rH%/

bar/psi

A 92 202 R/W 59

Ad2 ON/OFF control 2: alarm delay 0 0 250 min

A 122 232 R/W 59

AS3 ON/OFF control 3: control variable conﬁ guration

0Sm 8

probe 2 generic temperature

1 Sd1 9

probe 3 generic temperature

2Sr 10

probe 4 generic temperature

3Sv 11

probe 5 generic temperature

4 Sd2 12

probe 4 generic humidity

5Sc 13

probe 5 generic humidity

6SA 14

probe 5 generic pressure

7Su

3 0 14 -

A 119 229 R/W 58

r3S ON/OFF control 3: mode (0/1= direct/reverse) 0 0 1 -

D 162 51 R/W 58

SS3 ON/OFF control 3: set point 0.0 -50.0

0.0

-200.0

200.0

100.0 999

°C/°F/

rH%/

bar/psi

A 85 195 R/W 58

rS3 ON/OFF control 3: diﬀ erential 2.0 0.1 20.0 °C/°F/

rH%/

bar/psi

A 87 197 R/W 58

AL6 ON/OFF control 3: absolute low alarm threshold 0.0 -50.0

0.0

-200.0

200.0

100.0 999

°C/°F/

rH%/

bar/psi

A 89 199 R/W 59

AH6 ON/OFF control 3: absolute high alarm threshold 0.0 -50.0

0.0

-200.0

200.0

100.0 999

°C/°F/

rH%/

bar/psi

A 91 201 R/W 59

Ad6 ON/OFF control 3: alarm delay 0 0 250 min

A 121 231 R/W 59

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

Par. Description Def Min Max UOM Type CAREL SVP Modbus

SVP

R/W page

AM1 Modulating control: control variable conﬁ guration

3 0 14 -

A 123 233 R/W 59

r1M Modulating control: mode

0/1=direct/reverse

00 1 -

D 164 53 R/W 59

SM1 Modulating control: set point 0.0 -50.0

0.0

-200.0

200.0

100.0 999

°C/°F/

rH%/

bar/psi

A 93 203 R/W 59

rc1 Modulating control: diﬀ erential 2.0 0.1 20.0 °C/°F/

rH%/

bar/psi

A 94 204 R/W 59

rM1 Modulating control: modulation range, between min SL1 and max SH1 2.0 0.1 40.0 °C/°F/

rH%/

bar/psi

A 95 205 R/W 59

SL1 Modulating control: min. modulating output value (cut-oﬀ ) 0.0 0.0 SH1 %

A 125 235 R/W 59

SH1 Modulating control: max. modulating output value 100.0 SL1 100.0 %

A 124 234 R/W 59

AL3 Modulating control: absolute low alarm threshold 0.0 -50.0

0.0

-200.0

200.0

100.0 999

°C/°F/

rH%/

bar/psi

A 96 206 R/W 60

AH3 Modulating control: absolute high alarm threshold 0.0 -50.0

0.0

-200.0

200.0

100.0 999

°C/°F/

rH%/

bar/psi

A 97 207 R/W 60

Ad3 Modulating control: alarm delay 0 0 250 min

A 126 236 R/W 60

AA1

Alarm 1: select source

0 DI2 (with A5=15) 6 Probe S5 fault (E4) 1 Virtual probe (Sv) fault (rE) 7 Low pressure alarm (LP) 2 Probe S1 (Sm) fault (E0) 8 Immediate external alarm (IA) 3 Probe S2 fault (E1) 9 Low temperature alarm (LO) 4 Probe S3 fault (E2) 10 High temperature alarm (HI) 5 Probe S4 fault (E3) 11 High condenser temperature alarm (CHt)

0 0 11 -

A 127 237 R/W 60

r1A Alarm 1: logic

0/1=normally open/normally closed

00 1 -

D 165 54 R/W 60

Ad4 Alarm 1: delay 0 0 250 min

A 129 239 R/W 60

AA2

Alarm 2: select source

0 DI3 (with A9=15) 6 Probe S5 fault (E4) 1 Virtual probe (Sv) fault (rE) 7 Low pressure alarm (LP) 2 Probe S1 (Sm) fault (E0) 8 Immediate external alarm (IA) 3 Probe S2 fault (E1) 9 Low temperature alarm (LO) 4 Probe S3 fault (E2) 10 High temperature alarm (HI) 5 Probe S4 fault (E3) 11 High condenser temperature alarm (CHt)

0 0 11 -

A 128 238 R/W 60

r2A Alarm 2: logic

0/1=normally open/normally closed

00 1 -

D 166 55 R/W 60

Ad5 Alarm 2: delay 0 0 250 min

A 130 240 R/W 60

EVO

P1 Enable communication with EVD EVO module

0/1=no/yes

0 0 1 - D 70 27 R/W 39

P1t S1 probe type

0 RAZ. 0 to 5 V 2 4 to 20 mA remote 1 4 to 20 mA 3 4 to 20 mA external

0 0 3 - I 139 150 R/W 39

P1M Max value of S1 probe 12.8 -20 200 °C/°F A 31 22 R/W 39 P1n Min value of S1 probe -1 -20 200 °C/°F A 30 21 R/W 39 PVt Valve type

1 CAREL EXV 12 Sporlan seh 100 2 Alco ex4 13 Sporlan seh 175 3 Alco ex5 14 Danfoss ets 12.5 - 25b 4 Alco ex6 15 Danfoss ets 50b 5 Alco ex7 16 Danfoss ets 100b 6 Alco ex8 330hz CAREL recommended 17 Danfoss ets 250 7 Alco ex8 500hz Alco speciﬁ cation 18 Danfoss ets 400 8 Sporlan sei 0.5-11 19 2 CAREL EXV connected

together 9 Sporlan ser 1.5-20 20 Sporlan ser(i) g, j, k 10 Sporlan sei 30 21 Danfoss ccm 10-20-30 11 Sporlan sei 50 22 Danfoss ccm 40

1 1 22 - I 136 147 R/W 39

PH Refrigerant type

1 R22 9 R600A 17 R422A 25 HTR02 33 R448A 2 R134a 10 R717 18 R423A 26 R23 34 R449A 3 R404A 11 R744 19 R407A 27 R1234yf 35 R450A 4 R407C 12 R728 20 R427A 28 R1234ze 36 R452A 5 R410A 13 R1270 21 R245FA 29 R455A 37 R508B 6 R507A 14 R417A 22 R407F 30 R170 38 R452B 7 R290 15 R422D 23 R32 31 R442A 39 R513A 8 R600 16 R413A 24 HTR01 32 R447A 40 R454B

3 1 40 - I 135 146 R/W 39

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

Par. Description Def Min Max UOM Type CAREL SVP Modbus

SVP

R/W page

PrE Main regulation type

1 centralized cabinet cold room 3 perturbated cabinet cold room 2 self contained cabinet cold room 4 subcritical CO

cabinet/cold room

2 1 4 - I 137 148 R/W 39

P0 EVD Modbus address 198 1 247 - I 134 145 R/W 39 P3

Superheat setpoint

10 -72 324 K A 44 35 R/W 39

Proportional gain

15 0 800 - A 36 27 R/W 39

Integral time

150 0 999 sec A 148 159 R/W 39

Derivative time

2 0 800 sec A 37 28 R/W 39

LowSH: threshold low superheat

3 -72 324 K A 45 36 R/W 39

Low Superheat protection integral time

600 0 800 sec A 38 29 R/W 39

LowSH: low superheat alarm delay

600 0 999 sec A 150 161 R/W 39

PL1

LOP: threshold for low temperature of evaporation

-50 -60 200 °C/°F A 64 41 R/W 39

PL2

LOP: integral time

600 0 800 sec A 39 30 R/W 39

PL3

LOP: low evaporation temperature alarm delay

600 0 999 sec A 151 162 R/W 39

PM1 MOP: threshold for low temperature of evaporation 50 -60 200 °C/°F

A 47 38 R/W 39

PM2 MOP: integral time 600 0 800 sec

A 40 31 R/W 39

PM3 MOP: low evaporation temperature alarm delay 10 0 999 sec

I 152 163 R/W 39

cP1

Open valve startup (percentage)

50 0 100 % A 146 157 R/W 39

Pdd

Post defrost delay, (only for single driver)

10 0 60 min A 147 158 R/W 39

PSb

Valve position in stand-by

0 0 100 step A 169 174 R/W 39

PMP

Enable manual positioning

0 0 1 - D 103 38 R/W 39

PMu

Manual valve positioning

0 0 999 step I 162 173 R/W 39

Pnr Reset EVD setting 0 -> 1 Reset all EVD parameters 0 0 1 -

D 139 46 R/W 39

PLt Stop smooth lines oﬀ set 2.0 0.0 10.0 °C/°F

A 183 286 R/W 64

PHS Maximum smooth lines oﬀ set 15.0 0.0 50.0 °C/°F

A 184 287 R/W 64

PSP Smooth lines proportional coeﬃ cient 5.0 0.0 100.0 °C/°F

A 185 288 R/W 64

PSI Smooth lines integral time 120 0 1200 s

A 186 289 R/W 64

PSd Smooth lines derivative time 0 0 100 s

A 187 290 R/W 64

PSM Enable smooth lines (0=NO - 1=YES) 0 0 1 /

D 191 62 R/W 64

ICE

IPE

Enable EVDice communication 0/1 = not enabled/ enabled

0 0 1 - D 183 59 R/W 39

IrE 1= Multiplexed cabinet/cold room

2= Air-conditioner/chiller with plate heat exchanger 3= Air-conditioner/chiller with tube bundle heat exchanger 4= Air-conditioner/chiller with ﬁ nned coil heat exchanger 5= Reserved 6= Reserved

(2, 3, 4, 5

& 6 mode

select. only from UltraCella

service

pGD)

- I 196 185 R/W 40

IP3 Superheat set point 11 IC1 99 K A 150 255 R/W 40 PH

3 1 40 - I 135 146 R/W 40

IS1 S1 probe type

1 1 to 4.2 barg 7 0 to 45 barg 2 0.4 to 9.3 barg 8 1 to 12.8 barg 3 -1 to 9.3 barg 9 0 to 20.7 barg 4 0 to 17.3 barg 10 1.86 to 43.0 barg 5 0.85 to 34.2 barg 11 reserved 6 0 to 34.5 barg

3 1 11 - I 1 249 R/W 40

ICP PID: proportional gain

15 0 800 - A 151 256

R/W 40

Iti PID: integral time

150 0 999 sec I 171 252

R/W 40

IC1 LowSH protection: threshold

5 -9 IP3 °C/°F A 152 257

R/W 40

IC2 LowSH protection: integral time

15 0 800 sec A 153 258

R/W 40

IC3 LOP protection: threshold

-50 -121 IC5 °C/°F A 154 259

R/W 40

IC4 LOP protection: integral time

0 0 800 sec A 155 260

R/W 40

IC5 MOP protection: threshold

50 IC3 392 °C/°F A 156 261

R/W 40

IC6 MOP protection: integral time

20 0 800 sec A 157 262

R/W 40

IC7 MOP protection: disable threshold

30 -121 392 °C/°F A 158 263

R/W 40

IC8 Low suction temperature alarm threshold

-50 -121 392 °C/°F A 159 264

R/W 40

IIA Enable operating mode modiﬁ cation

0/1 = enabled/not enabled

0 0 1 - I 2 250

R/W 40

IU1 Enable manual valve positioning

0/1 = enabled/not enabled

0 0 1 - D 182 58

R/W 40

IU2 Manual valve position

0 0 999 step I 128 141

R/W 40

IU3 Valve control steps: 1/2 = 480/960 step

1 1 2 - I 195 184

R/W 40

IU4 Valve opening at start (evaporator/valve capacity ratio)

50 0 100 % I 173 254

R/W 40

In1 Serial address

99 1 99 - I 133 144

R/W 40

ICG Enable EVDice regulation

0/1 = not enabled/ enabled

0 0 1 - I 184 60 R/W 39

IL1 Pressure probe S1: minimum alarm value -1.0 -121.0 IH1 Bar/Psi A 203 303 R/W IH1 Pressure probe S1: maximum alarm value 9.3 IL1 392.0 Bar/Psi A 204 304 R/W

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

Par. Description Def Min Max UOM Type CAREL SVP Modbus

SVP

R/W page

Ultra 3PH Module commissioning

cH1 3PH module serial address 1 1 247 - I 185 177 R/W 41

cH2 3PH module oﬀ set serial address 0 0 232 - I 186 178 R/W 41

cH3 Type of three phase module

0 = Evaporator - 1 = Full

0 0 1 - I 187 179 R/W 41

cA1 Sd1 probe connection

0 = in UltraCella -1 = in 3PH module

0 0 1 - D 130 40 R/W 41

cA2 Sd2 probe connection

0 = in UltraCella -1 = in 3PH module

0 0 1 - D 131 41 R/W 41

cA3 Sc probe connection

(Full module only) 0 = in UltraCella - 1 = in 3PH module

0 0 1 - D 132 42 R/W 41

cEn Enable 3PH mod.

0 = disable - 1 = enable

0 0 1 - D 133 43 R/W 41

Out

H15 Output R1 conﬁ guration

0 Compressor 4 AUX 1 1 Defrost 5 AUX 2 2 Fan 6 AUX 3 3 Light 7 AUX 4

5 0 7 / A 170 273 R/W 63

H16 Output R2 conﬁ guration

0 Compressor 4 AUX 1 1 Defrost 5 AUX 2 2 Fan 6 AUX 3 3 Light 7 AUX 4

4 0 7 / A 171 274 R/W 63

H17 Output R3 conﬁ guration

0 Compressor 4 AUX 1 1 Defrost 5 AUX 2 2 Fan 6 AUX 3 3 Light 7 AUX 4

3 0 7 / A 172 275 R/W 63

H18 Output R4 conﬁ guration

0 Compressor 4 AUX 1 1 Defrost 5 AUX 2 2 Fan 6 AUX 3 3 Light 7 AUX 4

2 0 7 / A 173 276 R/W 63

H19 Output R5 conﬁ guration

0 Compressor 4 AUX 1 1 Defrost 5 AUX 2 2 Fan 6 AUX 3 3 Light 7 AUX 4

1 0 7 / A 174 277 R/W 63

H20 Output R6 conﬁ guration

0 Compressor 4 AUX 1 1 Defrost 5 AUX 2 2 Fan 6 AUX 3 3 Light 7 AUX 4

0 0 7 / A 175 278 R/W 63

HUM

StH Humidity set point 90.0 0.0 100.0 %rH A 28 19 R/W 58 rdH Humidity diﬀ erential 5.0 0.1 20.0 %rH A 29 20 R/W 58 rrH Dehumidiﬁ cation diﬀ erential 5.0 0.0 50.0 % A 195 298 R/W 60 rnH Humidity dead band 5.0 0.0 50.0 % A 196 299 R/W 60 TLL Minimum temperature to enable humidity control 0.0 -60.0 60.0 °C/°F A 192 295 R/W 60 THL Maximum temperature to enable humidity control 0.0 -60.0 60.0 °C/°F A 193 296 R/W 60 TdL Temperature diﬀ erential to enable humidity control 0.0 0.0 20.0 °C/°F A 194 297 R/W 60 r5 Humidity set point oﬀ set 0.0 -50.0 50.0 % A 199 302 R/W 60 F4 Humidity output during defrost

0/1 = ON/OFF

1 0 1 - D 71 28 R/W 51

58 U1 Humidity control duty cycle ON time 10 0 120 min A 197 300 R/W 60 U2 Humidity control duty cycle OFF time 60 0 120 min A 198 301 R/W 60 F11 Fan speed during humidiﬁ cation 40 0 100 % A 190 293 R/W 52 F12 Minimum fan speed during humidiﬁ cation 10 0 100 % A 191 294 R/W 52

HACCP alarms (MULTIFUNCTION MENU)

HA Date/time of last HA alarm: day - 1 7 day I 72 29 R 69

Date/time of last HA alarm: hour - 1 23 hour I 73 30 R 69 Date/time of last HA alarm:minute - 1 59 min I 74 31 R 69

HA1 Date/time of second last HA alarm: day - 1 7 day I 75 32 R 69

Date/time of second last HA alarm: hour - 1 23 hour I 76 33 R 69 Date/time of second last HA alarm:minute - 1 59 min I 77 34 R 69

HA2 Date/time of third last HA alarm: day - 1 7 day I 78 35 R 69

Date/time of third last HA alarm: hour - 1 23 hour I 79 36 R 69

Date/time of third last HA alarm:minute - 1 59 min I 80 37 R 69 HAn Number of HA alarms - 1 15 - I 96 53 R 69 HF Date/time of last HF alarm: day - 1 7 day I 81 38 R 69

Date/time of last HF alarm: hour - 1 23 hour I 82 39 R 69

Date/time of last HF alarm:minute - 1 59 min I 83 40 R 69

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

Par. Description Def Min Max UOM Type CAREL SVP Modbus

SVP

R/W page

HF1 Date/time of second last HF alarm: day - 1 7 day I 86 43 R 69

Date/time of second last HF alarm: hour - 1 23 hour I 87 44 R 69 Date/time of second last HF alarm:minute - 1 59 min I 88 45 R 69

HF2 Date/time of third last HF alarm: day - 1 7 day I 91 48 R 69

Date/time of third last HF alarm: hour - 1 23 hour I 92 49 R 69

Date/time of third last HF alarm: minute - 1 59 min I 93 50 R 69 HFn Number of HF alarms - 1 15 - I 97 54 R 69 Hcr Reset HACCP alarms 0 0 1 - D 23 12 R/W 69

Tab. 7.a

Variables accessible ONLY via serial connection

Message on the display

Description Type Variable type R/W CAREL

address

Modbus Address

rE Virtual probe fault alarm Alarm D R 39 17 E0 Probe 1 fault alarm Alarm D R 40 18 E1 Probe 2 fault alarm Alarm D R 41 19 E2 Probe 3 fault alarm Alarm D R 42 20 E3 Probe 4 fault alarm Alarm D R 43 21 E4 Probe 5 fault alarm Alarm D R 44 22 LO Low temperature alarm Alarm D R 45 23 HI High temperature alarm Alarm D R 46 24 IA Immediate external alarm Alarm D R 47 25 dA Delayed external alarm Alarm D R 48 26 Ed1 Defrost timeout alarm, evaporator 1 Alarm D R 50 28 Ed2 Defrost timeout alarm, evaporator 2 Alarm D R 51 29 Pd Pd alarm active Alarm D R 52 30 LP Low pressure alarm Alarm D R 53 31 Ats Pump Down autostart alarm Alarm D R 54 32 dor Door open for too long alarm Alarm D R 55 33 Etc RTC fault alarm Alarm D R 56 34 EE Control parameter EEPROM alarm Alarm D R 57 35 EF Operating parameter EEPROM alarm Alarm D R 58 36 HA Type HA HACCP alarm Alarm D R 59 37 HF Type HF HACCP alarm Alarm D R 60 38 CHT High condenser temperature alarm Alarm D R 62 40

- Active alarms Alarm D R 63 41 SHA EVD EVO - Low superheat protection Alarm D R 73 42 LOA EVD EVO - LOP protection Alarm D R 75 44 MOA EVD EVO - MOP protection Alarm D R 77 46 EEA EVD EVO - Valve motor fault Alarm D R 79 48 LSA EVD EVO - Low suction temperature alarm Alarm D R 81 50 Hit EVD EVO - High cond. temperature protection activated Alarm D R 83 52 ES1 EVD EVO - Probe S1 fault Alarm D R 84 53 ES2 EVD EVO - Probe S2 fault Alarm D R 85 54 ES3 EVD EVO - Probe S3 EVO fault Alarm D R 86 55 ES4 EVD EVO - Probe S4 alarm Alarm D R 87 56 bAt EVD EVO - Battery discharged or faulty Alarm D R 88 57 EEE EVD EVO - Op. and/or parameter EEPROM error Alarm D R 89 58 EIC EVD EVO - Valve not closed completely Alarm D R 90 59 EEC EVD EVO - Valve closed in emergency Alarm D R 91 60 EFU EVD EVO - FW compatibility error (>=5.0) Alarm D R 92 61 ECN EVD EVO - Conﬁ guration error Alarm D R 93 62 ELE EVD EVO oﬄ ine Alarm D R 94 63 dnL Parameter download not successful Alarm D R 115 75 uPd Parameter upload not successful Alarm D R 116 76 EPE 3PH module oﬄ ine Alarm D R 119 78 EP0 Probe Sd1 fault 3PH module Alarm D R 120 79 EP1 Probe Sd2 fault auxiliary evap. 3PH module Alarm D R 121 80 EP2 Probe Sc fault 3PH module Alarm D R 122 81 EPn 3PH module conﬁ guration error Alarm D R 123 82 EPM 3PH module motor protector alarm Alarm D R 124 83 EPU High/low pressure alarm or Kriwan activated 3PH module Alarm D R 125 84 LOG Recorded temperature download not successful Alarm D R 143 94 ALM Alarm log download not successful Alarm D R 144 95 SOF UltraCella software update not successful Alarm D R 145 96 IA1 EVD ICE - Probe S1 fault Alarm D R 169 110 IA2 EVD ICE - Probe S2 fault Alarm D R 170 111 IE1 EVD ICE - MOP alarm Alarm D R 171 112 IE2 EVD ICE - LOP alarm Alarm D R 172 113 IE3 EVD ICE - Low superheat alarm Alarm D R 173 114 IE4 EVD ICE - Low pressure alarm Alarm D R 174 115 IE5 EVD ICE - Valve closed in emergency Alarm D R 175 116 IE6 EVD ICE - Control from digital input if oﬄ ine Alarm D R 176 117 IE7 EVD ICE - Ultracap supplied at low voltage or battery low level Alarm D R 177 118 IE8 EVD ICE - Valve not closed completely Alarm D R 178 119 IEE EVD ICE - Op. and/or parameter EEPROM error Alarm D R 179 120 ILE EVD ICE oﬄ ine Alarm D R 180 121 IEC EVD ICE – Conﬁ guration error Alarm D R 185 123 IEM EVD ICE – Alignment error with UltraCella Alarm D R 186 124 Y1 0 to 10 V analogue output Status A R 6 5

- Virtual probe Status A R 26 6

- Application version Info A R 27 7

- EVD ICE - Probe S1 value Status A R 58 16

- EVD ICE - Probe S2 value Status A R 59 17

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

Message on the display

Description Type Variable type R/W CAREL

address

Modbus Address

- EVD EVO - Probe S1 value Status A R 60 18

- EVD EVO - Probe S2 value Status A R 61 19 ESA EVD EVO - Evaporation temperature Status A R 62 20

- EVD EVO - Superheat value Status A R 63 21 U1 Probe Sd1 value 3PH module Status A R 65 23 U2 Probe Sd2 value 3PH module Status A R 66 24 U3 Probe Sc value 3PH module Status A R 67 25

- 3PH0 to 10 V analogue output Status A R 68 26

- First variable shown on LED display Status A R 72 83

- Second variable shown on LED display Status A R 73 84

- EVD ICE - Valve position % Status A R 143 98

- EVD ICE - Superheat Status A R 144 99 ISu EVD ICE - Suction temperature Status A R 145 100

- EVD ICE - Evaporation pressure Status A R 146 101 ISa EVD ICE - Evaporation temperature Status A R 147 102 b1 Probe 1 value Status A R 160 105 b2 Probe 2 value Status A R 161 106 b3 Probe 3 value Status A R 162 107 b4 Probe 4 value Status A R 163 108 b5 Probe 5 value Status A R 164 109 di1 Digital input 1 status (N.C.) Status D R 2 1 di2 Digital input 2 status Status D R 3 2 di3 Digital input 3 status Status D R 4 3 do1 Compressor relay status Status D R 5 4 do2 Defrost relay status Status D R 6 5 do3 Evaporator fan relay status Status D R 7 6 do4 Light relay status Status D R 8 7 do6 AUX 2 relay status Status D R 9 8 do5 AUX 1 relay status Status D R 10 9

- Controller ON/OFF command Command D R/W 26 15

- Continuous cycle call command Command D R/W 27 16

- Defrost call command Command D R/W 28 17

- LIGHT activation command Command D R/W 29 18

- AUX1 activation command Command D R/W 30 19

- AUX2 activation command Command D R/W 31 20 oﬀ OFF Status D R 32 10 cc Continuous cycle Status D R 33 11 def Defrost Status D R 34 12

- Compressor Status D R 38 16

- Alarm reset Command D R/W 64 21 dU4 3PH digital input 1 status Status D R 127 86 dU5 3PH digital input 2 status Status D R 128 87

- EVD ICE - Valve position in steps Status I R 168 62

- EVD EVO - Valve position % Status I R 204 91

- EVD EVO - Valve position in steps Status I R 205 92

- EVD EVO - Oﬀ set on active SH set (smoothlines) Status A R 200 111

- EVD EVO - Active SH set (smoothlines) Status A R 201 112

- EVD EVO - Average SH set (smoothlines) Status A R 203 113

- EVD EVO - Smooth lines status Status D R 194 129

- EVD EVO - Cooling request Status D R 195 130

- EVD EVO - Smooth lines control active Status D R 187 128

- Compressor 1 status Status D R 196 131

- Fan status Status D R 197 132

- Light status Status D R 198 133

- AUX1 status Status D R 199 134

- AUX2 status Status D R 200 135

- AUX3 status Status D R 201 136

- AUX4 status Status D R 202 137

Tab. 7.b

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

Example: display after alarms rE and E0.

1 21 2

Note: in order to deactivate the buzzer and the relay alarm press the Alarm key

Note: the ﬁ gures refer to the screens on models with single row display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*,

the display shows the alarm messages on the second row.

Note: the buzzer is disabled during the wizard on the UltraCella Service terminal.

8.3 Reset alarms

Alarms with automatic reset automatically reset when the cause that generated them, for example, after the replacement of a faulty probe, at the end of the alarm for high temperature, etc. For those with manual reset it is necessary to ﬁ rst remove the cause that generated them, and then press the Alarm button for entire restore.

Example: display and manual restore alarm CHt (condenser high temperature)

1 21 2

Æ Å

1 21 2

Note: the ﬁ gures refer to the screens on models with single row display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*,

the display shows the alarm messages on the second row

8.4 HACCP alarms and display

In order to activate monitoring see par 8.6 (HACCP = Hazard Analysis and Critical Control Point). HACCP can only be activated on the controllers with the RTC option ﬁ tted, and allows control of the operating temperature and the recording of any anomalies due to power failures or increases in the operating temperature due to various causes (breakages, severe operating conditions, operator errors, etc…). There are two types of HACCP events:

• HA alarms, high temperature during operation;

• HF alarms, high temperature after power black out.

The alarm causes the blinking of HACCP icon, the display of the relative alarm code on the display, storage of the alarm and activation of the buzzer.

Example: display after HF error and restore of the alarm condition:

1 21 2

Æ Å

1 21 2

8. SIGNALS AND ALARMS

8.1 Signalling

The signals are messages that appear on the display to notify the user regarding the performance of control procedures (such as defrost) or conﬁ rmation of controls from keyboard.

Code Description

--- It appears at controller start-up

--- Probe not enabled

Parameters categories

Pro Probes CtL Control CMP Compressor dEF Defrost ALM Alarm Fan Fa n CnF Conﬁ guration HcP HACCP rtc Clock doL Door and light rcP Recipes GEF Generic functions EVO EVD EVO module ICE EVDice 3PH Three phases Module 3PH

Messages that appear during navigation

PAS Password HA HACCP alarm, HA type HF HACCP alarm, HF type rES Reset alarms with manual reset

Reset HACCP alarms

Reset temperature monitoring cc Continuous cycle Ed1 Defrost on evaporator 1 ended by time-out Ed2 Defrost on evaporator 2 ended by time-out On Switch ON OFF Switch OFF AUX Auxiliary output switch on request rEc Temperature registration no Operation not executed uPd Parameters upload dnL Parameters download bni Menu parameters set (bn) r01…r10 Recipe 1…10 MAX Maximum temperature read MIN Minimum temperature read Op Open cLo Closed EXT Exit menu Hcr Reset HACCP alarms VEr Software release LOG Temperature recorded download ALG Alarms recorded download

Tab. 8.a

8.2 Alarms

There are two types of alarms:

• system alarms: e.g. Eeprom alarms, communication (interrupted)

alarms, HACCP, high (HI) and low (LO) temperature alarms, high (AUH) and low (AUL) humidity;

• control alarms: e.g. pump down ended by time-out (Pd), low pressure

(LP).

The auxiliary digital outputs AUX1, AUX2 can be conﬁ gured to signal the alarm status, as normally energised or normally de-energised. See chapter 5. The control indicates the alarms triggered due to faults in the control itself, in the probes or in the network communication. You can also activate an alarm from external contact, immediate type. See chapter

4. On the display the message “IA” appears and at the same time the bell icon blinks and the buzzer activates. If more errors occur, they will appear in sequence on the display.

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

1 21 2

Note: the ﬁ gures refer to the screens on models with single row display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*,

the display shows the alarm messages on the second row

Display and cancel HACCP alarms

Access the multifunction menu (see chap. 3) and choose HcP. In the multifunction menu you can see the date and time of the last 3 alarms HA and HF. After entering the multifunction menu (see previous par.), select with UP / DOWN the message “HCP”.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

HA Date/time of last HA alarm 0 - - HA1 Date/time of second last HA alarm 0 - - HA2 Date/time of third last HA alarm 0 - - HAn Number of HA alarms 0 0 15 HF Date/time of last HF alarm 0 - - HF1 Date/time of second last HF alarm 0 - - HF2 Date/time of third last HF alarm 0 - - HFn Number of HF alarms 0 0 15 Hcr HACCP alarms cancelling

Action on variation 0Æ1 o 1Æ0

001 -

Procedure:

1. Press Set and then UP/DOWN to display the parameters of the

following table;

2. Press Set to display the alarm date and time;

3. Press Prg until you return to standard display.

4. To cancel all HACCP alarms, change the value of the parameter Hcr

Each alarm is displayed with scrolling text, which contains the day of week, hour, minute, and the temperature that caused the alarm. The buﬀ er in which are saved can contain the data of up to 3 alarms. Once full, the new alarm will replace the oldest one. Instead, the alarm counters (HAn, HFn), after reaching 15, they stop.

Example: HA alarm triggered Thursday at 13:17, with detected temperature of 36.8 °C.

1 21 2

ÅÅÅÅÅ

Note: the ﬁ gure refers to the screens on models with single row

display, P/Ns WB000S*. In models with two rows, P/Ns WB000D*, as well as the message indicated, during navigation the display shows the scrolling message “HACCP Alarms” on the second row.

8.5 EVD EVO alarms

If an Ultra EVD module, P/N WM00E%, is connected by Fieldbus, UltraCella will be able to signal the following alarms, which only depend on the status of the EVD EVO controller ﬁ tted on the module.

Alarm code

on display

Alarm

description

Button flashing

on display

Icon ﬂ ashing

on display

Alarm relay

Buzzer

Reset

SHA Low superheat protection - ON ON Automatic

LOA LOP protection

- ON ON Automatic

MOA MOP protection

- ON ON Automatic

EEA Valve motor fault

- ON ON Automatic

LSA Low suction temperature

- ON ON Automatic

Hit

High condensing temperature protection activated

- ON ON Automatic

ES1

Probe S1 fault or range exceeded alarm

- ON ON Automatic

ES2

Probe S2 fault or range exceeded alarm

- ON ON Automatic

ES3

Probe S3 fault or range exceeded alarm

- ON ON Automatic

ES4

Probe S4 fault or range exceeded alarm

- ON ON Automatic

bAt

Battery discharged or faulty or electrical connection interrupted

- ON ON Automatic

EEE

Operating and/or parameter EEPROM error

- ON ON Automatic

EIC

Valve not closed completely

- ON ON Automatic

EEC

Valve closed in emergency

- ON ON Automatic

EFu

FW compatibility error (>=5.0)

- ON ON Automatic

ECn Conﬁ guration error

- ON ON Automatic

ELE EVD oﬄ ine

- ON ON Automatic

Tab. 8.b

8.6 EVDice alarms

If an EVDice driver is connected via Fieldbus, UltraCella will be able to signal the following alarms, which depend solely on the status of the driver.

Alarm code

on display

Alarm

description

Button flashing

on display

Icon ﬂ ashing

on display

Alarm relay

Buzzer

Reset

IA1 Probe S1 fault

- ON ON Automatic

IA2 Probe S2 fault

- ON ON Automatic

IE1 MOP protection

- ON ON Automatic

IE2 LOP protection

- ON ON Automatic

IE3 Low superheat protection

- ON ON Automatic

IE4 Low suction temperature

alarm

- ON ON Automatic

IE5 Valve emergency closing

(Ultracap)

- ON ON Automatic

IE6 Regulation by digital input in

case of oﬄ ine

- ON ON Automatic

IE7 Ultracap module powered

with low voltage or low charge level

- ON ON Automatic

IE8 Emergency closure is not

completed

- ON ON Automatic

IEE Operating and/or parameter

EEPROM error

- ON ON Automatic

ILE EVD ICE oﬄ ine

- ON ON Automatic

IEC Conﬁ guration error

- ON ON Automatic

IEM Alignment error with

UltraCella

- ON ON Manual

Tab. 8.c

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

ALARM TABLE

Cod. display

Alarm cause

Icon on the

display ﬂ ashing

Display key

ﬂ ashing

Alarm relay

Buzzer

Reset

PD valve

Compressor

Defrost

Evaporator

Fans

Condenser fans

Continuous cycle

Virtual control probe fault

ON ON automatic duty setting(c4) duty setting(c4) - - - OFF

Probe B1 fault

ON ON automatic duty setting(c4) duty setting(c4) - - - OFF

Probe B2 fault

ON ON automatic - - - - - OFF

Probe B3 fault

ON ON automatic - - - - - -

Probe B4 fault

ON ON automatic - - - - - -

Probe B5 fault

ON ON automatic

Low temperature alarm

- ON ON automatic - - - - - -

High temperature alarm

- ON ON automatic - - - - - -

Immediate alarm from external contact

ON ON automatic duty setting (A6) duty setting(A6) OFF - - OFF

SA Serious alarm from external contact - ON ON automatic OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Pd

Maximum pump down time alarm

ON ON automatic - - - - - -

Low pressure alarm

ON ON automatic OFF OFF OFF - - -

AtS

Autostart in pump down

ON ON autom./man - - - - - -

CHt

High condenser temperature alarm

ON ON manual OFF OFF - - OFF -

dor

Door open too long alarm

ON ON automatic - - - - - -

Etc

Real time clock is broken

ON ON automatic - - - - - -

EEprom error, unit parameters

ON ON automatic - - - - - -

Eeprom error, operating parameters

ON ON automatic - - - - - -

Ed1, Ed2

Defrost ended by timeout -

ON ON automatic

HACCP alarm, HA type

ON ON manual - - - - - -

HACCP alarm, HF type

ON ON manual - - - - - -

LoG

Download recorded temperature fault

OFF ON automatic ------

uPL

Parameters upload fault

OFF ON automatic ------

dnL

Parameters download fault

OFF ON automatic ------

SOF Software update fault - OFF ON automatic -----SHA EVD EVO -

Low superheat protection -

ON ON automatic OFF OFF OFF - - -

LOA EVD EVO -

LOP protection -

ON ON automatic OFF OFF OFF - - -

MOA EVD EVO -

MOP protection -

ON ON automatic OFF OFF OFF - - -

EEA EVD EVO -

Valve motor fault -

ON ON automatic OFF OFF OFF - - -

LSA EVD EVO - Low suction temperature -

ON ON automatic - - - - - -

Hit EVD EVO -

High condensing temperature protection activated -

ON ON automatic - - - - - -

ES1 EVD EVO -

Probe S1 fault or range exceeded alarm -

ON ON automatic OFF OFF OFF - - -

ES2 EVD EVO -

Probe S2 fault or range exceeded alarm -

ON ON automatic OFF OFF OFF - - -

ES3 EVD EVO -

Probe S3 fault or range exceeded alarm -

ON ON automatic - - - - - -

ES4 EVD EVO -

Probe S4 fault or range exceeded alarm -

ON ON automatic - - - - - -

bAt

EVD EVO -

Battery discharged or faulty or electrical connection

interrupted

ON ON automatic - - - - - -

EEE EVD EVO -

Operating and/or parameter EEPROM error -

ON ON automatic OFF OFF OFF - - -

EIC EVD EVO -

Valve not closed completely -

ON ON automatic - - - - - -

EEC EVD EVO -

Valve closed in emergency -

ON ON automatic OFF OFF OFF - - -

EFu EVD EVO -

FW compatibility error (>=5.0) -

ON ON automatic - - - - - -

ECn EVD EVO -

Conﬁ guration error -

ON ON automatic - - - - - -

ELE EVD EVO - EVD oﬄ ine -

ON ON automatic OFF OFF OFF - - -

ALM Alarm log download log not successful -

OFF ON automatic - - - - - -

EPE Oﬀ -line 3PH module -

ON ON automatic OFF OFF OFF OFF - -

EP0 Sd1 probe fault (3PH module) -

ON ON automatic - -

End

time

if Sd1

only

---

8.7 3PH module alarms

Alarm code on

display

Alarm cause

Button ﬂ ashing

on display

Icon ﬂ ashing on

display

Alarm relay

Buzzer

Reset

EPE 3PH Module oﬀ -line - ON ON Automatic

EP0

Sd1 probe fault (3PH module)

- ON ON Automatic

EP1

Sd2 probe fault (3PH module)

- ON ON Automatic

EP2

Sc probe fault (3PH module)

- ON ON Automatic

EPn

3PH module conﬁ guration fault

- ON ON Automatic

EPM

Motor protector alarm (3PH module)

- ON ON Manual

EPU

High/low pressure or Kriwan alarm (3PH module)

- ON ON Manual

Tab. 8.d

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

EP1 Sd2 probe fault (3PH module) -

ON ON automatic - - - - - -

EP2 Sc probe fault (3PH module) -

ON ON automatic - - - - - -

EPn 3PH module conﬁ guration fault -

ON ON automatic OFF OFF OFF OFF - -

EPM Motor protector alarm (3PH module) -

ON ON manual OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF -

EPU High/low pressure or Kriwan alarm (3PH module) -

ON ON manual OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF -

AUH High humidity alarm - ON ON automatic - - - - - - AUL Low humidity alarm - ON ON automatic - - - - - - GH1 High generic alarm (stage 1 ON/OFF – generic function) - ON ON automatic - - - - - - GL1 Low generic alarm (stage 1 ON/OFF – generic function) - ON ON automatic - - - - - - GH2 High generic alarm (stage 2 ON/OFF – generic function) - ON ON automatic - - - - - - GL2 Low generic alarm (stage 2 ON/OFF – generic function) - ON ON automatic - - - - - - GH6 Generic high alarm (stage 3 ON/OFF - generic func.) - ON ON automatic - - - - - - GL6 Serious alarm from external contact - ON ON automatic - - - - - - GH3 High generic alarm (modulating output – generic function) - ON ON automatic - - - - - - GL3 Low generic alarm (modulating output – generic function) - ON ON automatic - - - - - - GA1 Generic alarm (alarm 1 – generic function) - ON ON automatic - - - - - - GA2 Generic alarm (alarm 2 – generic function) - ON ON automatic - - - - - - IA1 EVD ICE –

Probe S1 fault - ON ON automatic OFF OFF OFF - - -

IA2 EVD ICE –

Probe S2 fault - ON ON automatic OFF OFF OFF - - -

IE1 EVD ICE – MOP protection - ON ON automatic OFF OFF OFF - - - IE2 EVD ICE – LOP protection - ON ON automatic OFF OFF OFF - - - IE3 EVD ICE –

Low superheat protection - ON ON automatic OFF OFF OFF - - -

IE4 EVD ICE – low suction temperature alarm - ON ON automatic - - - - - - IE5 EVD ICE – valve in emergency closing (Ultracap) - ON ON automatic OFF OFF OFF - - - IE6 EVD ICE – control from dig. input if oﬄ ine - ON ON automatic OFF OFF OFF - - - IE7 EVD ICE – Ultracap module powered with low voltage or low

charge level

- ON ON automatic - - - - - -

IE8 EVD ICE – incomplete valve closing - ON ON automatic OFF OFF OFF - - - IEE EVD ICE – operating and/or parameter EEPROM error - ON ON automatic OFF OFF OFF - - - ILE EVD ICE – EVDICE oﬄ ine - ON ON automatic OFF OFF OFF - - - IEC EVD ICE – Conﬁ guration error - ON ON automatic OFF OFF - - - OFF IEM EVD ICE – Alignment error with UltraCella - ON ON manual - - - - - -

Tab. 8.e

8.8 Alarm parameters

High and low temperature alarm and activation parameters

AL (AH) allows you to determine the activation temperature for low (high) temperature alarm LO (HI). The set value AL (AH) is always compared with the value detected by the control probe. The parameter Ad represents the alarm activation delay in minutes; the low temperature alarm (LO) activates only if the temperature is lower than threshold AL for period of time greater than Ad. The thresholds can be relative or absolute, depending on the value of parameter A1. In the ﬁ rst case (A1=0) the value AL indicates the deviation regarding the set point and the low temperature alarm activation point is: set point - AL. If the set point diﬀ ers, the activation point will automatically diﬀ er. In the second case (A1=1), the value AL indicates the low temperature alarm threshold. An active low temperature alarm is indicated via internal buzzer, with the code LO on display and with the activation of the alarm relay. The same occurs for high temperature alarm (HI), considering AH instead of AL.

Par Description Def Min MaxUM

A0 Alarm and fan diﬀ erential 2.0 0.1 20.0 °C/°F A1 Alarms threshold (AL, AH) relative to set

point or absolute 0/1=relative/absolute

001-

AL Low temperature alarm threshold

If A1= 0, AL=0: alarm disabled If A1= 1, AL=-50: alarm disabled

0 -50.0 200 °C/°F

AH High temperature alarm threshold

If A1= 0, AL=0: alarm disabled If A1= 1, AL=200: alarm disabled

0 -50.0 200 °C/°F

Ad Delay time for low temperature and

high temperature alarms

120 0 250 min

A6 Stop compressor from external alarm

0 = compressor always oﬀ ; 100 = compressor always on;

0 0 100 min

LO HI

AL AH

OFF

ALARM

A1=1

Fig. 8.a

Key

LO Low temperature alarm HI High temperature alarm SV Adjustment probe

Notes:

• The alarm LO and HI are alarms with automatic reset. A0 determines

the hysteresis between the value of the activation and deactivation of the alarm;

• if you press the Alarm button when the measurement is above a

threshold, the buzzer and the alarm relay immediately turn oﬀ , and an indication of the alarm code will remain active until the measure falls within the activation threshold. Parameter A6 has similar meaning as parameter c4 (duty setting). If an external alarm occurs, the compressor works for a time equal to the value set for parameter A6, while it remains OFF for a ﬁ xed period of 15 minutes.

• In case of relative alarms (A1= 0) both AL and AH are considered as

absolute values (e.g. AL= -10 is considered as AL= 10)

High and low humidity alarms parameters

If either input B4 or B5 is conﬁ gured for a humidity probe (On), high (AUH) and low humidity alarms (AUL) can also be enabled, with absolute thresholds (UHL and ULL). The alarms are activated in the following conditions:

• If Su >= UHL --> high humidity alarm AUH

• If Su <= ULL --> low humidity alarm AUL

Par Description Def Min MaxUM

ULL Absolute low humidity alarm threshold

0=alarm disabled

0 0 100.0 %rH

UHL Absolute high humidity alarm threshold

100=alarm disabled

100.0 0 100.0 %rH

AdH Humidity alarms AUH, AUL delay 120 0 250 min

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

ALARM

OFF

black out

Fig. 8.c

Key

Sv Virtual probe AH High temperature alarm threshold ALARM HACCP alarm, HF type St Set point t Time

8.10 High condenser temperature alarm

You can monitor the temperature of the condenser to signal the high temperature, probably due to situations of clogging. The signalling follows the ﬁ gure below.

Par Description Def Min MaxUM

Ac High condenser temperature alarm

threshold

70 -50,0 200 °C/°F

Acd High condenser temperature alarm

delay

0 0 250 min

CHT

OFF

Ac+10

Acd

Fig. 8.d

Key

t Time Acd High condenser temperature alarm delay Sc Condenser probe Ac High condenser temperature alarm threshold CHT High condenser temperature alarm

8.9 HACCP Alarm parameters and monitoring activation

In order to activate HACCP alarm monitoring, set parameter HCE=1.

HA alarms

The HA alarm is generated if during normal operation it is noted that the temperature read by the control probe exceeds the high temperature threshold for the time Ad + Htd. Therefore compared to the normal high temperature alarm already signalled by the control, HACCP alarm type HA is delayed by a further Htd time speciﬁ c for HACCP recording.

Par. Description Def Min Max UoM

HCE Enabling HACCP

0/1=No/Yes

001 -

Htd HACCP alarm delay 0 0 250 min

ALARM

OFF

HtcAd

Fig. 8.b

Key

Sv Virtual probe St Set point t Time

AH High temperature alarm threshold ALARM HACCP alarm, HA type Ad Delay time for low temperature and high temperature alarms Htd HACCP alarm delay (0=monitoring disabled)

HF alarms

The HACCP alarm type HF is generated as a result of a power failure for a long time (> 1 minute), when after mains voltage restore the temperature read by the adjustment probe exceeds the high temperature threshold AH .

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

9. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

9.1 UltraCella technical characteristics

Power Supply Model 230V: Voltage 230 V~ (+10/-15%), 50/60 Hz; Power 18 VA, 100 mA~ max.

Model 24V: Voltage 24 V~ (+10/-15%), 50/60 Hz; Power 18 VA, 1A~ max.

Insulation ensured by 230V power supply

Insulation for low voltage: reinforced, 6 mm in air, 8 mm superﬁ cial, 3750 V. Insulation for relay outputs: reinforced, 3 mm in air, 4 mm superﬁ cial, 1250 V.

Analog inputs B1, B2, B3: NTC, PT1000 (+-3%)

B4: NTC, 0...10Vdc (+-3%) B5: 0...5Vdc ratiometric (+-3%) , 4...20mA (+-3%)

Analog output Y1: 0...10 Vdc (10mA max,+-5%) Note: When installing, keep the supply and loads connections away from the cables of the probes, digital inputs, and monitoring device. Probe Type NTC std. CAREL: 10 kΩ at 25°C, range from -50°C to 90°C;

measuring error: 1°C in range from -50°C to +50°C; 3°C in range from +50°C to +90°C NTC HT: 50 kΩ at 25°C, range from 0°C to 150°C; measuring error: 1.5°C in range from 0°C to +115°C; 4°C in range from +115°C to +150°C PT1000 std. CAREL: 1000 Ω at 0°C, range from –50°C to +90°C; measuring error 3°C in range from –50°C to 0°C; 5°C in range from 0°C to +90°C

Probe power supply +Vdc 12 V+-30%, 25 mA max; 5VREF: 5V+-2% Relay output Applicable ratings based on the relay type

Type of RelayEN60730 -1 (250 V ~) UL 873 (250 V ~)

8A (AUX1, AUX2) 8 (4)A on N.O.; 6 (4)A on N.C.; 2 (2)A on N.C. and N.O. (100000

cycles)

8A resistive 2FLA 12LRA, C300 (30000 cycles)

16A,(LIGHT, FAN) 10A resistive, 5 (3)A (100000 cycles) 10A resistive, 5FLA 18LRA (30000 cycles) 30A(COMP, DEF) 12 (10)A (100000 cycles) 12A resistive, 2HP, 12FLA 72LRA (30000 cycles) NOTE: The sum of the loads currents COMP, DEF, FAN accessed at the same time should not exceed 20A Insulation for low voltage: reinforced, 6 mm in air, 8 superﬁ cial, 3750 V. Insulation between independent relay outputs: reinforced, 3 mm in air, 4 superﬁ cial, 1250 V.

Connections Section of conductors for analog inputs and outputs, digital inputs, serial: from 0.5 to 2.5mm2 (from 20 to 13 AWG);

Section of supply and loads cables: from 1.5 to 2.5 mm2 (from 15 to 13 AWG) Serial connections:use shielded cables Maximum length of the cables: 10 m

Container Plastic: sizes 200 x 100 X 190 mm Assembly On wall (with plastic container): using fastening screws for front board Display LED display: 3 and 4 digits, display from -99 to 999; operating status indicated by LEDs and icons formed on the polycarbonate

applied to the plastic

Keyboard 10 keys on keyboard in polycarbonate membrane applied to the plastic Clock with buﬀ er battery Available depending on the model Buzzer Available on all models. Clock Depending on the model installed.

Accuracy: ±100 ppm Battery: “button” type with lithium code CR2430 voltage: 3Vdc (sizes 24x3 mm)

Serial 3 types of available serials: pLAN, BMS, Fieldbus

PLAN : Driver HW RS485, telephone jack (available only on few models) and screw terminals BMS Driver HW RS485, screw terminals Fieldbus: Driver HW RS485, screw terminals

USB Type: Host (A connector); 5Vdc supply, maximum absorption: 100mA (low power devices)

Operating conditions Only board: -10T65°C; <90% U.R. non condensing

With plastic container: -10T50°C, <90% U.R. non condensing Relay identiﬁ cation, type and maximum resistive current to operating temperature:

Relay Associated load Type of RelayMax resistive current applicable

R1 (AUX2) 8A 8A R2 (AUX1) 8A 8A R3 (LIGHT) 16A 10A

R4 (FAN) 16A 10A R5 (DEF) 30A 12A

R6 (COMP) 30A 12A NOTE: The sum of the loads currents COMP, DEF, FAN accessed at the same time should not exceed 20A.

Storage conditions -20T70°C, < 90% U.R. non condensing Front protection rating With plastic container: IP65 Environmental pollution 2, normal situation PTI of the isolating materials Printed circuits 250, plastic and insulation materials 175 Resistance to ﬁ re class: Category D Protection against overcharging class Category II, without PE terminal

Category I, with PE terminal

Type of action and disconnection Relay contact 1 B (micro-disconnection) Control system manufacture Incorporated, electronic control device Classiﬁ cation according to protection against electric shock Class II by means of appropriate incorporation Device intended to be hand-held or built into equipment designed to be hand held

Class and structure of the software

Class A

Control front cleaning Only use neutral detergents and water

Tab. 9.a

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

9.2 EVD Modules technical characteristics

Power supply voltage: 230 V~ (+10/-15%), 50/60 Hz; power: 4,5kW max.

NOTE: The maximum simultaneous current draw by all the loads connected to the controller and the

expansion modules must not exceed 20 A.

Classiﬁ cation according to protection against electric shock

Class II

Case plastic, dimensions 128x290x110 mm Front protection rating with plastic case IP65 Fire resistance category category D Cleaning the module front panel only use neutral detergents and water Operating conditions -10T40°C, <90% r.H. non condensing Storage conditions -20T60°C, <90% r.H. non condensing PTI of insulating materials printed circuits 250, plastic and insulating materials 175

Tab. 9.b

9.3 Power Modules technical characteristics

Power supply voltage: 230 V~ (+10/-15%), 50/60 Hz; power: 4,5kW max.

NOTE: The maximum simultaneous current draw by all the loads connected to the controller and

the expansion modules must not exceed 20 A

Residual current circuit breaker In=20 A @30 °C, Id=300 mA Power relay Rating: 30 A resistive, 240 Vac; 3HP 240 Vac Classiﬁ cation according to protection against electric shock Class II Case plastic, dimensions 128x290x110 mm Front protection rating with plastic case IP65 Fire resistance category Category D Cleaning the module front panel only use neutral detergents and water Operating conditions -10T40°C, <90% r.H. non condensing Storage conditions -20T60°C, <90% r.H. non condensing

Tab. 9.c

9.4 3PH EVAPORATOR Modules technical characteristics

Power supply voltage: 400V~(+10/-15%), 50/60Hz, 3PH+N+T, Imax 25A Classiﬁ cation according to protection against electric shock Class I Case plastic, dimensions 452x380x186 mm Weight 8,7 Kg Front protection rating with plastic case IP65 Cleaning the module front panel only use neutral detergents and water Operating conditions -10T40°C, <90% r.H. non condensing Storage conditions -20T60°C, <90% r.H. non condensing Materials frontal cover in polycarbonate, retro box in technopolymer

Tab. 9.d

9.4.1 Electrical characteristics

Ultra 3PH Evaporator module 6kW Ultra 3PH Evaporator module 9kW Ultra 3PH Evaporator module 20kW

Code WT00E600N0 WT00E900N0 WT00EA00N0 General

Main switch / general protection 4-pole circuit breaker 16A 6kA D 4-pole circuit breaker25A 6KA D 4-pole circuit breaker 40A 6KA D Loads power supply

400V~(±10%), 50/60Hz, 3PH+N+T 400V~(±10%), 50/60Hz, 3PH+N+T 400V~(±10%), 50/60Hz, 3PH+N+T

Insulating transformer PRI 230 Vac

SEC1 230 Vac 40VA

SEC2 24 Vac 35VA

SEC protection by fuses

PRI 230 Vac

SEC1 230 Vac 40VA

SEC2 24 Vac 35VA

SEC protection by fuses

PRI 230 Vac

SEC1 230 Vac 40VA

SEC2 24 Vac 35VA

SEC protection by fuses

Status and alarm indication By UltraCella By UltraCella by UltraCella Input

Main defrost probe NTC 10kΩ NTC 10kΩ NTC 10kΩ Auxiliary evap. defrost probe NTC 10kΩ NTC 10kΩ NTC 10kΩ Clicson evaporator Present Present Present Thermostat evaporator Present Present Present

Output Condensing unit enabling / Solenoid valve 8A (AC1) / 2A (AC23) 1PH 8A (AC1) / 2A (AC23) 1PH 8A (AC1) / 2A (AC23) 1PH Defrost heaters 6kW, 9A (AC1) 3PH 9kW, 13A (AC1) 3PH 20kW, 28A (AC1) 3PH Evaporator fans 0,55kW, 1,5A* (AC23) 3PH

0…10Vdc

2kW, 5,7A* (AC23) 3PH

0…10Vdc

4kW, 9,6A* (AC23) 3PH

0…10Vdc

AUX1 output 16A (AC1) 1PH 16A (AC1) 1PH 16A (AC1) 1PH

Tab. 9.e

* Rating with cosφ=0,5; With diﬀ erent power factor, to calculate the rating consider the formula: I = P / (400 * √3 * cosφ) where P is the power in W

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

9.5 3PH FULL Modules technical characteristics

Power supply voltage: 400V~(+10/-15%), 50/60Hz, 3PH+N+T, Imax 25A Classiﬁ cation according to protection against electric shock Class I Case plastic, dimensions 452x380x186 mm Weight 9,8 Kg Front protection rating with plastic case IP65 Cleaning the module front panel only use neutral detergents and water Operating conditions -10T40°C, <90% r.H. non condensing Storage conditions -20T60°C, <90% r.H. non condensing Materials frontal cover in polycarbonate, retro box in technopolymer

Tab. 9.f

9.5.1 Electrical characteristics

Ultra 3PH Full module 4HP Ultra 3PH Full module 7.5HP

Code WT00F4B0N0 WT00F7C0N0

General

Main switch / general protection 4 poles magnetothermic 16A 6kA D 4 poles magnetothermic 25A 6KA D Loads power supply

400V~ (±10%), 50/60Hz, 3PH+N+T 400V~ (±10%), 50/60Hz, 3PH+N+T

Insulating transformer PRI 230 Vac

SEC1 230 Vac 40VA

SEC2 24 Vac 35VA

Protection SEC by fuses

PRI 230 Vac

SEC1 230 Vac 40VA

SEC2 24 Vac 35VA

Protection SEC by fuses Status and alarm indication By UltraCella By UltraCella Regulation range of compressor current rating 10…16A (AC3) 3PH 16…20A (AC3) 3PH

Input

Main defrost probe NTC 10kΩ NTC 10kΩ Auxiliary evap. defrost probe NTC 10kΩ NTC 10kΩ Condensing probe NTC 10kΩ NTC 10kΩ Partial condenser Present Present Pump down Present Present High/Low pressure Present Present Kriwan compressor Present Present Clicson evaporator Present Present Thermostat evaporator Present Present

Output

Compressor 10...16A (AC3) 3PH 16...20A (AC3) 3PH Oil compressor heater (Carter) 100W, 0,5A (AC1) 1PH 100W, 0,5A (AC1) 1PH Condensing fans 0,8kW, 4A (AC15) 1PH 0,8kW, 4A (AC15) 1PH Defrost heaters 6kW, 9A (AC1) 3PH 9kW, 13A (AC1) 3PH Evaporator fans 0,55kW, 1,5A* (AC23) 3PH

0…10Vdc

2kW, 5,7A* (AC23) 3PH

0…10Vdc AUX1 output 16A (AC1) 1PH 16A (AC1) 1PH Solenoid valve Present Present

Tab. 9.g

* Rating with cosφ=0,5; With diﬀ erent power factor, to calculate the rating consider the formula: I = P / (400 * √3 * cosφ) where P is the power in W

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

10. ELECTRICAL WIRING 3PH MODULES

10.1 Electrical wiring 3PH EVAPORATOR Module

10.1.1 Power circuit

QF1

KM1

5/D4

KM2

5/D3

XP1

MV1

RR1

XP1

4/A1

4/B1

PER UNA CORRETTA INSTALLAZIONE

ELETTRICA SI RACCOMANDA

DI INSTALLARE A MONTE

DEL SEZIONATORE PRESENTE

SUL QUADRO, UNA PROTEZIONE

MAGNETOTERMICA DIFFERENZIALE

FOR THE RIGHT INSTALLATION

IS RECOMMENDED A DIFFERENTIAL

BREAKER SWITCH MOUNTED

UPSTREAM THE GENERAL ISOLATOR

OF THIS PANEL

I IdI I

EVAPORATOR FANS DEFROST HEATERS

POWER SUPPLY 3P+N+T 400V 50/60HZ

MACHINE LIMIT

CYAN

BROWN

GRAY

WHITE

BROWN

GRAY

WHITE

CYAN

Fig. 10.a

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

10.1.2 Power circuit

3/A8

3/B8

QF2

N1N2

XA1

PE1

TC1

0(I)

230

0(O1)

230(O1)

0(O2)

24(O2)

35VA

40VA

5/D1

5/E1

7/C1

FU1

FU2

FU3

FU4

MACHINE LIMIT

WHITE

CYAN

RED

WHITE

CYAN

Fig. 10.b

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

10.1.3 Auxiliary circuit

KM1

A1A2

KM2

A1A2

KR3

A1A2

4/D8

4/E8

XA1

117

XA1

119

XA1

128

XA1

129

XA1

109

XA1

110

118

XA1

120

TS1

SP3

KR2

A1A2

KR2

111214

5/D7

AUX1

AP3

J12J11J10

Ultra 3PH I/O module

J11/NO3 J11/C3/4/5 J11/NO4 J11/C3/4/5 J11/NO5 J12/NO6 J12/C6J12/NC6J10/NO2J10/C1/2J10/NO1

XA1

148

XA1

149

KR3

111214

5/D5

AUX2

SECURITY THERMOSTAT EVAPORATOR CLICSON

MACHINE LIMIT

MAX 16A AC1

ULTRACELLA

CONSENT

UNIT

CONDENSING

RED

ORANGE

Fig. 10.c

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

10.1.4 Auxiliary circuit

XA1

140

XA1

142

XA1

143

XA1

141

ST1 ST2

Ultra 3PH I/O module

J2/GNDJ2/U10J2/U9J2/U8J2/U7J2/GNDJ2/U6J2/U5J2/U4J2/GNDJ2/U3J2/U2J2/U1

XA1

146

XA1

147

TS2

GND

DEFROST DEFROST AUX

MACHINE LIMIT

FANS EVAPORATORE 0-10VDC

RED

Fig. 10.d

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

10.1.5 Auxiliary circuit

4/D8

XA1

160

161

162

GND

J9J6J1

Ultra 3PH I/O module

AP1

J6/- J6/+ J6/GND J9/+5VREF J9/GND J11/+VDCJ1/VBATJ1/G0J1/G

MACHINE LIMIT

485 ULTRACELLA

BELDEN

RED

Fig. 10.e

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

10.1.6 Connection for operation with power to solenoid valve

If the solenoid valve requires power, the 230 Vac power supply available at terminals 128-129 can be used, as shown in the following wiring diagram:

128

148

149

129

liquid valve

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

10.1.7 Terminal units

GND

109

2727

110

2626

117

1818

118

2020

119

1919

120

2222

128

1616

129

1515

140

2828

141

2929

142

3030

143

2929

146

3131

147

2929

148

2525

149

2424

160

3232

161

3333

162

3434

PE1

PE2

PE3

AUX1:1

AUX1:2

TS1

SP3

AP3:L

AP3:N

ST1

ST2

TS2:Y

TS2:GND

AUX2:1

AUX2:2

AP1:J6/-

AP1:J6/+

AP1:J6/GND

KM1:2

KM1:4

KM1:6

QF1:8/QF2:N1

KM2:2

KM2:4

KM2:6

QF1:8

MV1:U

MV1:V

MV1:W

RR1

KR2:11

KR2:14

??:J10/NO1

KM2:A1

??:J10/NO2

KM1:A1

FU2:2/??:J12/NC6

KR1:A2/KR2:A2

??:J2/U1

XA1:143

??:J2/U2

XA1:141/??:J2/GND

??:J2/U6

??:J2/GND

KR1:11

KR1:14

AP:-

AP:+

AP:GND

TC1:PE

AUX 1

Safe thermostat

Evaporator fans clicson

UltraCella

defrost

defrost aux

Evaporator fans 0...10Vdc

Condensing unit enabling

Control

terminal block XP1

terminal block XA1

Evaporator fans

Defrost heaters

Fig. 10.f

Terminals Number and description Notes

XP1

Evaporator fans -2 3 5

Defrost heaters -

6 7 8 PE Ground terminal -

XA1

109

AUX1 relay 110

117

Safe thermostat evaporator fans

Normally closed. If active (open), evaporator fans are oﬀ and it’s not notiﬁ ed in UltraCella

118 119

Clicson evaporator fans

Normally closed. If active (open), evaporator fans are oﬀ and it’s not notiﬁ ed in UltraCella

120 128

Power supply 230Vac for UltraCella To supply UltraCella 129

140

Defrost probe NTC 141

142

Defrost probe NTC aux evaporator 143

146 0…10V for evaporator fans (signal) 147 0…10V for evaporator fans (GND) 148

Condensing unit enabling / Solenoid valve 149

160 RS485 -

Fieldbus - connection to UltraCella161 RS485 + 162 RS485 GND PE1

Ground terminals -PE2

PE3

Tab. 10.a

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

10.2 Electrical wiring 3PH FULL Module

10.2.1 Power circuit

QF1

KM1

5/D4

KM2

5/D3

KM3

5/D5

>I >I >I

QM1

XP1

MV1

RR1

MV2

XP1

4/A1

4/B1

PER UNA CORRETTA INSTALLAZIONE

ELETTRICA SI RACCOMANDA

DI INSTALLARE A MONTE

DEL SEZIONATORE PRESENTE

SUL QUADRO, UNA PROTEZIONE

MAGNETOTERMICA DIFFERENZIALE

FOR THE RIGHT INSTALLATION

IS RECOMMENDED A DIFFERENTIAL

BREAKER SWITCH MOUNTED

UPSTREAM THE GENERAL ISOLATOR

OF THIS PANEL

I IdI I

EVAPORATOR FANS DEFROST HEATERSCOMPRESSOR

POWER SUPPLY 3P+N+T 400V 50/60HZ

MACHINE LIMIT

BROWN

CYAN

GRAY

WHITE

BROWN

GRAY

WHITE

BROWN

GRAY

WHITE

BROWN

GRAY

WHITE

CYAN

BROWN

GRIGIO

WHITE

CYAN

Fig. 10.g

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

10.2.2 Power circuit

3/A8

3/B8

QF2

N1N2

KM3

1314

5/D5

KM3

6162

5/D5

XA1

101

102

XA1

105

106

XA1

107

108

XA1

103

XA1

104

SP1

MV3

12PE

MV4

12PE

RR2

XA1

PE1

5/D1

5/E1

7/C1

PE2

PE3

TC1

0(I)

230

0(O1)

230(O1)

0(O2)

24(O2)

35VA

40VA

PARTIALIZATION PRESSURE SWITCH CONDENSER FAN

CONDENSER FANS 1 CONDENSER FANS 2

CRANKCASE HEATER

(Carter)

MACHINE LIMIT

800W MAX

WHITE

CYAN

WHITE

CYAN

RED

FU1

FU2

FU3

FU4

Fig. 10.h

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

10.2.3 Auxiliary circuit

KM1

A1A2

KM2

A1A2

KM3

A1A2

AP2

N 11 12 14

4/D8

4/E8

XA1

111

112

114

113

XA1

115

XA1

116

SP2

XA1

117

XA1

121

XA1

119

XA1

126

XA1

127

XA1

128

XA1

129

XA1

109

XA1

110

118

XA1

120

XA1

125

124

XA1

123

XA1

122

TS1

SP3

KR1

A1A2

TK1

KR2

A1A2

KR2

111214

5/D7

AUX1

AP3

J12J11J10

Ultra 3PH I/O module

J11/NO3 J11/C3/4/5 J11/NO4 J11/C3/4/5 J11/NO5 J12/NO6 J12/C6J12/NC6J10/NO2J10/C1/2J10/NO1

YV1

KRIWAN PRESSURE SWITCH SECURITY THERMOSTAT EVAPORATOR CLICSON

MACHINE LIMIT

PUMP DOWN

MAX 16A AC1

ULTRACELLA

LIQUID VALVE

VEDI PG.9

ORANGE

RED

Fig. 10.i

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

10.2.4 Auxiliary circuit

XA1

140

XA1

142

XA1

144

XA1

145

XA1

143

XA1

141

ST1 ST2 ST3

J2/GNDJ2/U10J2/U9J2/U8J2/U7J2/GNDJ2/U6J2/U5J2/U4J2/GNDJ2/U3J2/U2J2/U1

QM1

1314

3/B4

KR1

111214

5/D2

XA1

146

XA1

147

TS2

GND

DEFROST PROBE DEFROST AUX PROBE CONDENSER PROBE

MACHINE LIMIT

EVAPORATOR FANS 0...10VDC

RED

Ultra 3PH I/O module

Fig. 10.j

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

10.2.5 Auxiliary circuit

4/D8

XA1

160

161

162

GND

J9J6J1

J6/- J6/+ J6/GND J9/+5VREF J9/GND J11/+VDCJ1/VBATJ1/G0J1/G

Ultra 3PH I/O module

MACHINE LIMIT

RS485 FIELDBUS TO ULTRACELLA

BELDEN

RED

Fig. 10.k

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

Connections for pump down controlled by pressure, with simultaneous activation of the compressor and solenoid valve

If the pump down procedure needs to be performed, controlled by pressure via a pressure switch connected to the Ultra 3PH Full threephase module rather than UltraCella, with simultaneous actvation and deactivation of the compressor and solenoid valve, the connections are as shown in the following diagram.

122

123

124

125

126

127

pump down pressure switch

liquid valve

bridge

low pressure switch

Fig. 9.g

With this conﬁ guration, when there is no cooling request from UltraCella (Sv<St), the solenoid valve (terminals 126-127) and the compressor (KM3) are simultaneously deactivated. In normal operation, when the pressure switch measures measures the low pressure threshold, the compressor is shut down.

Fig. 9.h

Nota: Do not enable pump down on UltraCella (set c7=0, H1≠5,

H5≠5).

10.2.6 Connection for Pump Down or thermostat working

Connections for pump down controlled by pressure, with compressor shutdown due to low pressure

If the pump down procedure needs to be performed, controlled by pressure via a pressure switch connected to the Ultra 3PH Full threephase module rather than UltraCella, and the compressor shuts down due to low pressure, the connections are as shown in the following diagram.

121

123

124

125

126

127

pump down pressure switch

liquid valve

bridge

low pressure switch

Fig. 9.e

With this conﬁ guration, when there is no cooling request from UltraCella (Sv<St), the solenoid valve (terminals 126-127) opens, while the compressor (KM3) remains on until the pressure switch measures the low pressure threshold (TK1, terminals 124-125).

Fig. 9.f

Note: as the pressure switch is connected to the Ultra 3PH Full three-phase module, do not enable pump down on UltraCella (set c7=0, H1≠5, H5≠5).

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

Connections for pump down with simultaneous activation of the compressor and solenoid valve

If the pump down procedure needs to be performed, with simultaneous actvation and deactivation of the compressor and solenoid valve and without a pressure switch, the connections are as shown in the following diagram.

122

123

124

125

126

127

liquid valve

bridge

Fig. 9.i

With this conﬁ guration, when there is no cooling request from UltraCella (Sv<St), the solenoid valve (terminals 126-127) and the compressor (KM3) are simultaneously deactivated.

Fig. 9.j

Nota: Do not enable pump down on UltraCella (set c7=0, H1≠5,

H5≠5).

Connections for timed pump down

If the pump down procedure needs to be performed based on a time setting, with the solenoid valve connected to the Ultra 3PH Full threephase module rather than UltraCella, the connections are as shown in the following diagram.

122

124

125

109

110

liquid valve

bridge

128

129

Fig. 9.k

On UltraCella, conﬁ gure:

• H1 = 5 (output AUX1, terminals 109-110, for pump down valve)

• c10 = 1 (timed pump down)

• c7 > 0 (pump down time)

With this conﬁ guration, when there is no cooling request from UltraCella (Sv<St), the solenoid valve (terminals 109-110, output AUX1 on UltraCella) opens, while the compressor (KM3) remains on for the time deﬁ ned by parameter c7

Fig. 9.l

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

10.2.7 Terminal units

KM1:22KM1:43KM1:64QF1:8/QF2:N15KM2:26KM2:47KM2:68QF1:89KM3:210KM3:411KM3:6

PE2

101

XA1:103

102

QF2:N2/XA1:106

103

XA1:101/KM3:14

104

XA1:105

105

XA1:104

106

XA1:108/XA1:102

107

KM3:62

108

XA1:106

109

KR2:11

110

KR2:14

111

FU2:2/XA1:113

112

KR1:A2/FU1:2

113

XA1:128/XA1:111

114

XA1:115

115

XA1:114

116

KR1:A1

117

??:J10/NO1

118

KM2:A1

119

??:J10/NO2

120

KM1:A1

121

??:J11/C3/4/5

122

XA1:126/??:J11/NO3

123

124

3535

125

KM3:A1

126

XA1:122

127

KM3:A2/XA1:129

128

??:J12/NC6/XA1:113

129

XA1:127/KR2:A2

140

??:J2/U1

141

XA1:143

142

??:J2/U2

143

XA1:145/XA1:141

144

??:J2/U3

145

??:J2/GND/XA1:143

146

??:J2/U6

147

KR1:11

160

AP:-

161

AP:+

162

AP:GND

PE109

TC1:PE

P P P

GND

MV1:U

MV1:V

MV1:W

RR1

MV2:U

MV2:V

MV2:W

MV3:1

MV3:2

SP1

MV4:1

MV4:2

RR2

AUX1:1

AUX1:2

AP2:L

AP2:N

AP2:11

AP2:14

SP2

TS1

SP3

TK1

YV1

ULTRACELLA:L

ULTRACELLA:N

ST1

ST2

ST3

7AP1:Y

7AP1:GND

AP1:J6/-

AP1:J6/+

AP1:J6/GND

terminal block XA1

terminal block XP1

evaporator fans

defrost heaters

compressor

condenser fans 1

partialization pressure switch condenser fan

condenser fans 2

crankcase heater

aux 1

kriwan

pressure switch

security thermostat

evaporator clicson

pump down

liquid valve

ultracella

defrost probe

defrost probe auxiliary evap.

condenser probe

evaporator fans 0...10Vdc

control

Fig. 10.l

Term. Number and description Note

XP1

Evaporator fans -2 3 5

Defrost heaters -

6 7 8 9

Compressor -10 11 PE2 Ground terminal -

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

XA1

101

Condensing fans 1 -

102 103

Pressure switch condensing fans partialization -

104 105

Condensing fans 2 -

106 107

Oil compressor heater (Carter) -

108 109

UX1 relay -

110 111

Kriwan -

112 113 114 115

High/low Pressure switch -

116 117

Safe thermostat evaporator fans Normally closed. If active (open), evaporator fans are oﬀ and it’s not notiﬁ ed in UltraCella

118 119

Clicson evaporator fans Normally closed. If active (open), evaporator fans are oﬀ and it’s not notiﬁ ed in UltraCella

120 124

Pump Down -

125 126

Solenoid valve -

127 128

Power supply 230Vac for UltraCella To supply UltraCella

129 140

Defrost probe NTC -

141 142

Defrost probe NTC aux evaporator -

143 146 0…10V for evaporator fans (signal) 147 0…10V for evaporator fans (GND) 160 RS485 -

Connection RS485 Fieldbus to UltraCella161 RS485 + 162 RS485 GND PE109 Ground terminal -

Tab. 10.b

11. SOFTWARE RELEASE

11.1 Software release table

Manual release

Availability date

Functions UltraCella

Software release

Notes

1.1 28/02/2014 Basic cold room management: compressor, defrost, evaporator fans, light, 2xAUX relays

1.1 UltraCella single digit display

Single digit display management

Commissioning UltraCella through both built-in LED display and pGD1 UltraCella Service

Commissioning through wizard on pGD1

Upload/Download parameters via USB key

Defrost schedule by RTC

HACCP alarms

Maximum and minimum temperature recording

Diagnosis: I/O status visualization

Second step compressor with automatic rotation

Evaporator fans in PWM mode (on/oﬀ ) with compressor oﬀ

Auxiliary evaporator management

Smart light management by door switch

Bowl heater activation

Condenser fan activation by temperature

Pump down management

Humidity probe reading

Pre-charged conﬁ gurations (recipes)

Software update through pGD1

1.3 30/06/2014 Double digit display management 1.2 UltraCella double digit display (software

release 1.2) availability in production: 11/04/2014

Data logging function (one temperature)

Humidity ON/OFF output

Serial connection UltraCella - EVD EVO (only "start command")

Service menu on pGD1 (diagnosis)

Navigation improvements on both LED and pGD1 1.3 UltraCella software 1.3 availability in

production: 30/06/2014

Added alarm indication on USB functions (in case of bad working)

Commissioning EVD EVO via UltraCella

Defrost by dI (ﬁ xed interval time) enable with RTC defrost set too

Limit and default parameter setting change (H0, /t2, dd, Fd)

0…10V output for variable speed evaporator fans

"Bugﬁ xing: Input B5 Humidity reading High/low temp. alarm delay EVD communication in manual OFF status"

1.4 UltraCella software 1.4 availability in production: 03/11/2014

1.5 30/01/2015 3PH expansion module management (one to one) 1.5 UltraCella software 1.5 availability in production: 22/12/2014

Data logging: 2 selectable temperatures, variable sampling time

Log of stored alarms

BMS serial line: Modbus / Carel protocols selectable

Software update by built-in LED display

Addition of pGD texts in German and French

New default /A2=1 (defrost probe conﬁ gured in B2)

New default settings for EVD module (push from UltraCella)

Door switch disabling (new question in wizard and new parameter A3)

100

ENG

UltraCella +0300083EN - rel. 2.0 - 02.05.2017

1.6 31/10/2015 0 to 10 V output for variable speed condenser fans managed by pressure/ temperature + ﬂ oating condensing) algorithm

1.6 UltraCella software 1.6 availability in production: 27/07/2015

Heating/cooling control with dead band

EVDice conﬁ guration from UltraCella

Generic functions

Auxiliary output activation by time bands

Set point variation by time bands / from digital input

Set point ramps

Humidity data logging

High / low humidity alarm management

Possibility to disable alarms Ed1 / Ed2 (parameter A8)

Additional pGD texts in Spanish

Alarms on high/low humidity levels

AUX1/AUX2 icon on active display when corresponding relay output active

PMU variable (% valve opening in manual mode for EVD EVO) visible on built-in LED display

1.7 07/01/2016 Improved EVDice management: management of signatures to protect custom conﬁ gurations

1.7 UltraCella software 1.7 availability in production: 20/11/2015

Conﬁ guration of BMS serial parameters

Language selection as ﬁ rst question in wizard

Addition of EVD EVO MOP parameters on UltraCella LED display

New default conﬁ guration for communication between UltraCella and 3PH modules

Door microswitch disabled by default (A3=1)

Parameter IPE (enable EVDice communication with UltraCella) available on supervisor

2.0 31/03/2017 Compatibility with new refrigerants 1.9 / 2.0 UltraCella software release 2.0 availability in production: 30/01/2017

Humidity, humidiﬁ cation and dehumidiﬁ cation management

Improved heating management

Implementation of serious alarm SA

Improved fan management

Output (relay) conﬁ guration

Smooth lines & ﬂ oating suction

Third generic ON/OFF function added

Tab. 11.a

Carel WB000S series, WB000D series User Manual

Specifications and Main Features

Frequently Asked Questions

User Manual